1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8343 \begin_layout Verbatim
8347 The following 2 lines are empty:
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim
8358 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8387 \begin_layout Section
8388 Nesting Environments
8389 \begin_inset Index idx
8392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8393 Nesting ! Environments
8399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8408 \begin_layout Subsection
8412 \begin_layout Standard
8414 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8416 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8418 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8420 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Enumerate
8454 \begin_layout Standard
8455 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8456 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8458 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8464 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8476 \begin_inset space ~
8481 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8483 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8506 arg "depth-increment"
8512 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8517 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8523 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8524 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8525 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8526 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8529 \begin_layout Standard
8530 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8532 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8534 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8537 \begin_layout Subsection
8538 What You Can and Can't Nest
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8543 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8548 than a simple yes or no.
8549 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Completely unnestable
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8566 \begin_layout Standard
8567 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8568 environments have them:
8571 \begin_layout Description
8572 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8573 Can't nest into them.
8577 \begin_layout Itemize
8583 \begin_layout Itemize
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Description
8610 \begin_inset space ~
8613 Nestable You can nest them.
8614 You can nest other things into them.
8618 \begin_layout Itemize
8624 \begin_layout Itemize
8630 \begin_layout Itemize
8636 \begin_layout Itemize
8642 \begin_layout Itemize
8648 \begin_layout Itemize
8654 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8673 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Description
8681 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8682 You can't nest anything into them.
8686 \begin_layout Itemize
8692 \begin_layout Itemize
8698 \begin_layout Itemize
8704 \begin_layout Itemize
8710 \begin_layout Itemize
8716 \begin_layout Itemize
8722 \begin_layout Itemize
8728 \begin_layout Itemize
8734 \begin_layout Itemize
8740 \begin_layout Itemize
8746 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Itemize
8758 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_inset space ~
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 \begin_layout Standard
8782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8800 \begin_inset space ~
8803 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8804 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8805 nested section headings violate this.
8813 \begin_layout Subsection
8814 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8815 \begin_inset Index idx
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8827 \begin_layout Standard
8828 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8829 affected by nesting anyhow.
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Itemize
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8855 Figures and tables in
8859 are not affected by this.
8864 Have a look at section
8865 \begin_inset space ~
8869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8871 reference "sec:Floats"
8875 for more information about
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8884 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8885 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8890 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8898 of its own, it behaves just like a
8899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8906 paragraph environment.
8907 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8911 \begin_layout Standard
8912 Here's an example with a table:
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 This is (a) and it's nested.
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8934 \begin_inset Tabular
8935 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8936 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9022 \begin_layout Standard
9023 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9030 \begin_layout Enumerate
9032 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9036 \begin_layout Enumerate
9040 \begin_layout Standard
9041 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 This is (a) and it's nested.
9054 \begin_layout Standard
9055 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9063 \begin_inset Tabular
9064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9067 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9152 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9158 \begin_layout Enumerate
9165 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9178 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9181 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 \begin_layout Enumerate
9190 This is (a) and it's nested.
9193 \begin_layout Standard
9194 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9202 \begin_inset Tabular
9203 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9204 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9206 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9298 \begin_layout Enumerate
9300 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9307 \begin_layout Enumerate
9311 \begin_layout Standard
9312 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9318 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9319 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9323 \begin_layout Subsection
9324 Usage and General Features
9327 \begin_layout Standard
9328 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9329 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9338 is the innermost possible depth.
9339 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9343 level #1 – outermost
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9367 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Standard
9377 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9378 both of them in the example.
9379 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9389 For example, if we tried to nest another
9394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9401 , we would get errors.
9404 \begin_layout Subsection
9406 \begin_inset Index idx
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9418 \begin_layout Standard
9419 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9420 We have several examples of nested environments.
9421 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9426 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9429 \begin_layout Labeling
9430 \labelwidthstring MMM
9431 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9440 \begin_layout Labeling
9441 \labelwidthstring MMM
9442 #2-a This is level #2.
9443 We created it by using
9446 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9452 arg "depth-increment"
9459 \begin_layout Labeling
9460 \labelwidthstring MMM
9461 #3-a This is level #3.
9462 This time, we just enter
9469 arg "depth-increment"
9473 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9477 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9483 arg "depth-increment"
9490 \begin_layout Standard
9495 environment, nested inside of
9496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9504 So, it's at level #4.
9505 We did this by entering
9508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9514 arg "depth-increment"
9517 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9522 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9538 \begin_layout Standard
9543 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9546 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9552 \begin_layout Labeling
9553 \labelwidthstring MMM
9554 #4-a This is level #4.
9558 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9561 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9566 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9570 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9575 keep nesting things inside
9576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9587 \begin_layout Labeling
9588 \labelwidthstring MMM
9589 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9597 and this is level #6.
9598 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9602 \begin_layout Labeling
9603 \labelwidthstring MMM
9604 #5-b Back to level #5.
9608 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9614 arg "depth-decrement"
9621 \begin_layout Labeling
9622 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9632 arg "depth-decrement"
9635 , we're back at level #4.
9639 \begin_layout Labeling
9640 \labelwidthstring MMM
9641 #3-b Back to level #3.
9642 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #2-b Back to level #2.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9656 After this sentence, we will enter
9660 and change the paragraph environment back to
9667 \begin_layout Standard
9668 We could have also used the
9684 environment in place of the
9689 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9692 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9693 Example 2: Inheritance
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9697 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9700 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9709 arg "depth-increment"
9713 \begin_inset Newline newline
9716 which, we will change to the
9724 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 environment, at level #2.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9733 Notice how the nested
9737 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9741 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 We ended this example by entering
9751 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9755 and reset the nesting depth by using
9758 arg "depth-decrement"
9764 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9765 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9774 \begin_inset Argument 1
9777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9778 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9787 This is level #1, in an
9791 paragraph environment.
9792 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9801 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9807 arg "depth-increment"
9811 Now, what happens if we nest an
9815 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9816 label be? An asterisk?
9820 \begin_layout Itemize
9830 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9831 So, its label is a bullet.
9832 (We got here by using
9835 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9841 arg "depth-increment"
9844 , then changing the environment to
9852 \begin_layout Itemize
9853 Here's level #4, produced using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9871 \begin_layout Enumerate
9874 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9879 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9883 , because we are in the
9891 environment (that is, it is an
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9911 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9912 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9917 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9920 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9930 arg "depth-decrement"
9933 to decrease the depth after the next
9936 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9943 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9953 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9958 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9967 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9972 reset the counter for the label.
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9986 arg "depth-decrement"
9989 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9990 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9991 into the twofold-nested
9999 \begin_layout Enumerate
10000 The same thing happens if we do another
10003 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10009 arg "depth-decrement"
10012 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10015 \begin_layout Standard
10016 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10021 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10032 The number of other
10036 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10043 The same rule applies for the
10047 environment, as well.
10050 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10051 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10054 \begin_layout Enumerate
10055 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10056 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10057 the same detail with how we did it.
10066 \begin_layout Standard
10074 arg "depth-increment"
10081 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10082 the example in parentheses someplace.
10083 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10084 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10085 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10089 \begin_layout Enumerate
10094 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10098 \begin_layout Verse
10099 Now we will add verse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10103 It will get much worse.
10104 \begin_inset Newline newline
10114 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10129 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10130 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10144 \begin_layout Verse
10145 Here comes a table:
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10150 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10158 \begin_inset Tabular
10159 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10160 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10162 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10247 \begin_layout Verse
10251 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10261 arg "depth-increment"
10267 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10273 \begin_inset Newline newline
10281 arg "depth-decrement"
10288 \begin_layout Enumerate
10293 : level #1) This is another item.
10294 Note that selecting a
10298 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10299 3 times to put the table inside the
10307 \begin_layout Quotation
10308 We're now ending the
10312 list and changing to
10317 We're still at level #1.
10318 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10319 The next set of paragraphs is a
10320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10327 We will nest both the
10334 \begin_inset space ~
10339 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10343 for the letter body.
10347 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10350 to preserve the depth.
10351 Remember that you need to use
10354 arg "newline-insert newline"
10357 to create multiple lines inside the
10364 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Right Address
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10379 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 \begin_layout Address
10388 \begin_inset space ~
10394 \begin_layout Quotation
10395 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10399 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10400 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10401 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10402 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10403 as soon as possible.
10404 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10407 \begin_layout Quotation
10408 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10409 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10410 with your order, along with payment.
10413 \begin_layout Quotation
10414 We thank you again for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Address
10419 \begin_inset Newline newline
10426 \begin_layout Quotation
10427 That ends that example!
10430 \begin_layout Standard
10431 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10432 gives you a lot of power with just
10434 We could have easily nested an
10455 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10458 \begin_layout Subsection
10460 \begin_inset Index idx
10463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10464 Nesting ! Separation
10470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10472 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10482 For example you need two different enumerations:
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10499 \begin_layout Standard
10500 \begin_inset Separator plain
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Standard
10513 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Enumerate
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10533 list item and use the menu
10535 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10536 Start New Environment
10539 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10540 ) and behind it the new list.
10543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10544 Start New Parent Environment
10546 only appears if the item is nested.
10547 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10551 \begin_layout Standard
10552 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10553 (red arrow in LyX).
10554 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10555 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10562 arg "paragraph-break"
10569 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10572 \begin_layout Section
10573 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10574 \begin_inset Index idx
10577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10586 \begin_layout Standard
10587 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10588 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10590 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10591 be broken at the end of a line.
10592 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10596 \begin_layout Subsection
10598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10600 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10605 \begin_inset Index idx
10608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10617 \begin_layout Standard
10618 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10619 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10620 ) not to break the line at
10622 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10625 \begin_layout Quote
10626 Further documentation is given in section
10627 \begin_inset Newline newline
10631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10633 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10641 \begin_layout Standard
10642 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10657 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10666 A protected space is set with
10668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10679 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10685 \begin_layout Subsection
10687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10689 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10694 \begin_inset Index idx
10697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10698 Spacing ! Horizontal
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10707 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10714 The length units are listed in Appendix
10715 \begin_inset space ~
10719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10721 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10732 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10737 \begin_inset Index idx
10740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10741 Spaces ! Inter-word
10749 \begin_layout Standard
10750 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10751 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10752 at the ends of sentences.
10753 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10754 automatically takes care about this.
10755 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10756 followed by a period; see section
10757 \begin_inset space ~
10761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10763 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10768 To insert a normal space, select
10770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10773 \begin_inset space ~
10781 arg "space-insert normal"
10787 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10791 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10796 \begin_inset Index idx
10799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10817 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10827 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10828 inside abbreviations:
10831 \begin_layout Quote
10833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10837 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10840 \begin_layout Standard
10841 or between values and units.
10842 Compare for example this:
10843 \begin_inset Newline newline
10847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10851 \begin_inset Newline newline
10854 10 kg (normal space
10857 \begin_layout Standard
10858 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10863 \begin_inset space ~
10871 arg "space-insert thin"
10877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10881 \begin_layout Standard
10882 You can also insert the following space types:
10885 \begin_layout Description
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10894 space A line with a
10895 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10899 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10903 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10906 negative thin space between the arrows.
10909 \begin_layout Description
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10918 space A line with a
10919 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10923 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10927 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10930 negative medium space between the arrows.
10933 \begin_layout Description
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10942 space A line with a
10943 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10947 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10951 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10954 negative thick space between the arrows.
10957 \begin_layout Description
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10967 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10971 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10975 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10979 \begin_inset space ~
10983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10986 em) space between the arrows.
10989 \begin_layout Description
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10999 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11003 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11007 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11011 \begin_inset space ~
11015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11018 em) space between the arrows.
11021 \begin_layout Description
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11035 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space ~
11047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11050 em) space between the arrows.
11053 \begin_layout Description
11055 \begin_inset space ~
11059 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11063 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11075 cm space between the arrows.
11078 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset space ~
11084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11086 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11090 lists the different space sizes.
11093 \begin_layout Standard
11094 \begin_inset Float table
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11105 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11109 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11119 \begin_inset Tabular
11120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11187 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11239 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11398 \begin_inset Index idx
11401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11410 \begin_layout Standard
11411 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11412 feature for adding extra space
11413 in a uniform fashion.
11414 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11415 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11416 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11417 equally between themselves.
11420 \begin_layout Standard
11421 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11424 \begin_layout Quote
11426 This is on the left side
11427 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11430 This is on the right
11433 \begin_layout Quote
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11440 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_layout Quote
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_layout Standard
11464 That was an example in the
11470 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11474 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11478 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 is one in a standard paragraph.
11482 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11486 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11489 \begin_layout Standard
11490 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11498 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11503 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11507 \begin_inset space ~
11513 \begin_layout Standard
11515 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_layout Standard
11527 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11531 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_layout Standard
11539 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11543 \begin_inset space ~
11549 \begin_layout Standard
11551 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11561 \begin_layout Standard
11563 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11567 \begin_inset space ~
11573 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11582 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11586 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11588 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11589 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11593 option in the space dialog.
11601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11605 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11610 \begin_inset Index idx
11613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11624 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11628 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11631 What is correct English?:
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset Newline newline
11640 \begin_inset space ~
11643 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11644 \begin_inset Newline newline
11648 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset Newline newline
11663 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11674 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11680 \begin_layout Standard
11682 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset space ~
11695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11699 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11706 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset space ~
11720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11723 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11732 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11733 That is why it is named
11734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11742 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11743 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11747 \begin_layout Subsection
11749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11751 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11756 \begin_inset Index idx
11759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 \begin_layout Standard
11769 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11772 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11780 There you find the following sizes:
11783 \begin_layout Standard
11796 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11797 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11802 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11804 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11805 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11807 \begin_inset space ~
11813 \begin_inset Index idx
11816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11817 Document ! Settings
11822 for the paragraph separation.
11823 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11834 \begin_layout Standard
11840 \begin_inset Index idx
11843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11849 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11850 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11855 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11856 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11865 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11874 s are described in section
11875 \begin_inset space ~
11879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11881 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11890 If there are several
11894 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11895 You can therefore use
11899 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11902 \begin_layout Standard
11907 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11908 \begin_inset space ~
11912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11914 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11932 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11933 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11945 \begin_layout Subsection
11946 Paragraph Alignment
11947 \begin_inset Index idx
11950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11951 Paragraph ! Alignment
11959 \begin_layout Standard
11960 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11962 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11965 dialog (toolbar button
11968 arg "layout-paragraph"
11972 There are five possibilities:
11975 \begin_layout Itemize
11983 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11989 \begin_layout Itemize
11997 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12003 \begin_layout Itemize
12011 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12017 \begin_layout Itemize
12025 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12031 \begin_layout Itemize
12039 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12045 \begin_layout Standard
12046 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12047 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12048 the left and right margins.
12049 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 This paragraph is right aligned,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is centered,
12062 \begin_layout Standard
12064 this one is left aligned.
12067 \begin_layout Subsection
12069 \begin_inset Index idx
12072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12073 Page breaks ! Forced
12079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12081 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12088 \begin_layout Standard
12089 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12090 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12091 force a page break where you want one.
12092 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12093 is good at page breaking.
12094 Only if you use a lot of
12098 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12102 \begin_layout Standard
12103 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12104 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12108 have to change the page breaking.
12111 \begin_layout Standard
12112 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12114 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12119 \begin_inset space ~
12125 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12135 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12137 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12138 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12141 \begin_layout Standard
12142 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12143 at the top of a page.
12144 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12146 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12147 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12148 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12152 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12156 to learn more about
12163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12167 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12172 \begin_inset Index idx
12175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12176 Page breaks ! Clear
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12185 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12186 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12187 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12188 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12189 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12192 \begin_layout Standard
12193 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12196 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12198 \begin_inset space ~
12204 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset space ~
12218 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12219 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12222 \begin_layout Subsection
12224 \begin_inset Index idx
12227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12236 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12243 \begin_layout Standard
12244 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12246 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12249 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12263 arg "newline-insert newline"
12267 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12270 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12276 \begin_inset space ~
12284 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12287 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12289 This is useful to avoid
12290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12297 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12300 \begin_layout Standard
12301 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12302 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12304 very good at line breaking.
12305 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12306 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12307 \begin_inset space ~
12311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12313 reference "sec:Quote"
12318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12320 reference "sec:Verse"
12325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12327 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12334 \begin_layout Subsection
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12338 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12343 \begin_inset Index idx
12346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12355 \begin_layout Standard
12357 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12368 \begin_layout Standard
12372 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12373 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12375 \begin_inset space ~
12380 you can insert horizontal lines.
12381 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12382 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12383 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12386 \begin_layout Standard
12388 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12399 \begin_layout Section
12400 Characters and Symbols
12403 \begin_layout Standard
12404 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12405 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12406 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12414 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12418 for information on how this is done.
12421 \begin_layout Standard
12422 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12427 dialog via the menu
12429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12430 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12437 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12445 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12446 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12448 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12456 \begin_layout Section
12457 Fonts and Text Styles
12458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12460 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12467 \begin_layout Subsection
12469 \begin_inset Index idx
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12481 \begin_layout Standard
12482 There are two types of fonts:
12485 \begin_layout Description
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12491 \begin_inset Index idx
12494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12505 characters) in the font.
12506 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12507 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12508 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12509 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12510 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12511 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12512 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12513 \begin_inset Newline newline
12516 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12517 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12518 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12519 sizes than at small ones.
12520 \begin_inset Newline newline
12534 \begin_inset space ~
12542 \begin_layout Description
12544 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_inset Index idx
12551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12557 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12558 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12559 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12560 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12561 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12562 image manipulation program.
12563 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12564 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels high up to 34
12569 \begin_inset space ~
12572 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12573 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12574 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12576 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12577 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12578 \begin_inset Newline newline
12581 Bitmap fonts are named
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12589 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12593 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12594 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12595 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12596 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12597 use scalable fonts.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12604 \begin_layout Standard
12605 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12606 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12607 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12608 font to emphasize text, you use an
12609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12617 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12619 In \SpecialChar LyX
12620 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12624 \begin_layout Subsection
12627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12629 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12636 \begin_layout Standard
12637 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 used its own fonts.
12639 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12640 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12644 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12645 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12646 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12647 to a word processor.
12648 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12649 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 files are very portable across
12651 different machines.
12652 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12653 has increased a lot
12654 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12657 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12659 \begin_inset space ~
12663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12665 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12670 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12671 code in the document
12672 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12677 engines that are also able directly
12678 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12680 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12682 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12684 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12685 that is installed on your system.
12686 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12698 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12699 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12707 \begin_layout Subsection
12708 Document Font and Font size
12709 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12711 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_layout Standard
12739 You can set the document fonts in the
12741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12745 \begin_inset Index idx
12748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12749 Document ! Settings
12759 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12760 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12763 \begin_inset space ~
12772 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12777 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12780 \begin_layout Standard
12785 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12786 This requires that you use
12798 as the output format, i.
12799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12803 \begin_inset space \space{}
12806 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12807 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12808 installed (see section
12809 \begin_inset space ~
12813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12815 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12820 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12823 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12825 \begin_inset space ~
12828 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12829 cannot determine the family.
12830 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12831 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12834 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12838 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12839 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12844 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12850 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12851 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12860 \begin_inset space ~
12866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12891 European Computer Modern
12894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12902 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12910 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12911 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12916 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12919 \begin_inset space ~
12924 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12930 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12931 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12934 \begin_layout Itemize
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12943 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12956 \begin_inset space ~
12961 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12962 community in order to replace
12966 as the default font.
12967 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12968 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 One difference is improved kerning.
12993 \begin_layout Itemize
12994 If you do not like the look of
13002 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13007 \begin_inset space ~
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13023 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13024 \begin_inset space ~
13027 serif and typewriter fonts,
13031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13032 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13039 \begin_inset space ~
13048 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13053 \begin_inset space \space{}
13061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13065 \begin_inset space \space{}
13071 \begin_inset space ~
13079 \begin_inset space ~
13089 but you can also select your own.
13090 \begin_inset Newline newline
13093 The differences between roman,
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13105 fonts are explained in section
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13112 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13117 \begin_inset Newline newline
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13128 was originally designed for newspapers.
13129 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13130 into the small newspaper columns.
13134 \begin_inset space ~
13139 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13142 \begin_layout Standard
13143 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13156 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13161 depends on the class you are using.
13162 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13165 \begin_layout Standard
13166 Note that the font size is the
13171 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13172 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13173 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13174 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13177 \begin_inset space ~
13183 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13184 \begin_inset space ~
13188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13190 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13197 \begin_layout Standard
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13206 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13208 \begin_inset space ~
13211 serif or typewriter.
13216 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13226 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13229 \begin_layout Standard
13234 LaTeX font encoding
13236 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13237 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13243 \begin_inset Index idx
13246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13254 \begin_inset space ~
13258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13260 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13265 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13266 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13273 \begin_layout Standard
13274 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13276 Use Old Style Figures
13280 Use True Small Caps
13283 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13286 Use Old Style Figures
13288 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13290 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13298 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13302 Use True Small Caps
13304 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13305 of scaled capitals.
13306 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13307 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13310 \begin_layout Standard
13315 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13316 a font to display the script characters.
13320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13321 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13327 \begin_inset Index idx
13330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13337 So this has no effect for the document language
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13356 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13358 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13359 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13365 \begin_inset Index idx
13368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13370 packages ! microtype
13378 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13380 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13383 \begin_layout Standard
13384 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13396 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13401 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13402 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13404 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13406 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13409 dialog, see section
13410 \begin_inset space ~
13414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13416 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13428 \begin_layout Subsection
13432 \begin_layout Standard
13433 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13434 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13436 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13437 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13438 choose a math font in the dialog
13440 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13444 \begin_inset Index idx
13447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13448 Document ! Settings
13454 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13455 automatically selects a math font.
13456 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13457 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13466 \begin_inset space ~
13472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13477 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13478 document font is available.
13481 \begin_layout Standard
13482 Note that the math font will not be used for
13486 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13492 or by the insertion of the command
13499 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13500 \begin_inset space ~
13504 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13505 while the math characters do not.
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13510 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13513 \begin_inset space ~
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13526 in the document font settings.
13529 \begin_layout Standard
13530 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13531 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13532 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13533 font (in most cases
13534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13540 \begin_inset space ~
13546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13549 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13550 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13558 \begin_inset space ~
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13570 \begin_layout Subsection
13571 Using Different Character Styles
13572 \begin_inset Index idx
13575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13582 \begin_inset Index idx
13585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13594 \begin_layout Standard
13595 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13596 automatically changes the character style for certain
13597 paragraph environments.
13599 supports two character styles,
13608 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13617 style, do one of the following:
13620 \begin_layout Itemize
13621 click on the toolbar button
13630 \begin_layout Itemize
13631 use the key binding
13640 \begin_layout Standard
13641 These commands are all toggles.
13646 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13649 \begin_layout Standard
13650 One typically uses the
13654 style for proper names.
13656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13663 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13671 \begin_layout Standard
13672 A more widely used character style is the
13677 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13684 \begin_layout Itemize
13685 clicking on the toolbar button
13694 \begin_layout Itemize
13695 using the keybindings
13704 \begin_layout Standard
13709 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13711 use a different font.
13714 \begin_layout Standard
13715 We've been using the
13719 style all over the place in this document.
13720 Here's one more example:
13723 \begin_layout Quotation
13726 Do not overuse character styles!
13729 \begin_layout Standard
13730 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13731 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13732 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13733 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13737 \begin_layout Standard
13738 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13746 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13748 \begin_inset space ~
13751 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13757 arg "dialog-show character"
13763 \begin_layout Subsection
13764 Fine-Tuning with the
13769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13771 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13776 \begin_inset Index idx
13779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13788 \begin_layout Standard
13789 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13791 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13792 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13793 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13794 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13795 from ordinary dialog.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13799 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13800 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13801 \begin_inset Newline newline
13804 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13805 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13808 \begin_layout Standard
13809 To use custom character styles, open the
13811 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13816 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13819 dialog or press the toolbar button
13822 arg "dialog-show character"
13826 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13827 font property that you can choose.
13828 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13836 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13841 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13842 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13843 environments all at once.
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13847 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13850 \begin_inset space ~
13862 \begin_layout Labeling
13863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13877 The possible options are:
13881 \begin_layout Labeling
13882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13887 This is the Roman font family.
13888 Normally a serif font.
13889 It's also the default family.
13899 \begin_layout Labeling
13900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13904 \begin_inset space ~
13911 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13923 \begin_layout Labeling
13924 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13931 This is the Typewriter font family.
13937 arg "font-typewriter"
13946 \begin_layout Labeling
13947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13952 This corresponds to the print weight.
13957 \begin_layout Labeling
13958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13963 This is the Medium font series.
13964 It's also the default series.
13967 \begin_layout Labeling
13968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13975 This is the Bold font series.
13988 \begin_layout Labeling
13989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 As the name implies.
13999 \begin_layout Labeling
14000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14005 This is the Upright font shape.
14006 It's also the default shape.
14009 \begin_layout Labeling
14010 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14024 s the Italic font shape
14030 \begin_layout Labeling
14031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14038 This is the Slanted font shape
14040 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14041 , this is different from italic).
14044 \begin_layout Labeling
14045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14049 \begin_inset space ~
14056 This is the Small caps font shape
14063 \begin_layout Labeling
14064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14069 Alters the text color.
14070 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14074 \begin_inset space ~
14079 , which means that the document default color set in
14081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14088 \begin_inset space ~
14093 is used, you can choose between
14170 \begin_inset Index idx
14173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14182 \begin_layout Labeling
14183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14188 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14189 the language of the document.
14190 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14191 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14193 \begin_inset Newline newline
14196 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14198 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14199 When using the spell checking (see section
14200 \begin_inset space ~
14204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14206 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14210 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14213 \begin_layout Labeling
14214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14219 Alters the size of the font.
14220 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14221 proportional to the document font size.
14222 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14223 the details, but a general description of what
14229 \begin_layout Labeling
14230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14251 arg "font-size tiny"
14257 \begin_layout Labeling
14258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14279 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14285 \begin_layout Labeling
14286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14307 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14313 \begin_layout Labeling
14314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14335 arg "font-size small"
14341 \begin_layout Labeling
14342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14356 It's also the default size.
14360 arg "font-size normal"
14366 \begin_layout Labeling
14367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14388 arg "font-size large"
14394 \begin_layout Labeling
14395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14416 arg "font-size larger"
14422 \begin_layout Labeling
14423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14444 arg "font-size largest"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14472 arg "font-size huge"
14478 \begin_layout Labeling
14479 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14500 arg "font-size giant"
14506 \begin_layout Labeling
14507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14512 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14532 arg "font-size increase"
14538 \begin_layout Labeling
14539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14544 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14564 arg "font-size decrease"
14571 \begin_layout Standard
14576 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14577 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14579 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14580 — use those instead.
14581 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14584 \begin_layout Labeling
14585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14590 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14595 \begin_layout Labeling
14596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14603 This is text with emphasize on
14606 This might seem like the same as
14610 , but it is actually a bit different.
14616 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14618 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14621 \begin_layout Labeling
14622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14629 This is text with Underbar on.
14635 arg "font-underline"
14641 \begin_inset Newline newline
14646 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14647 when you could not change fonts.
14648 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14649 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14650 because some people
14654 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14657 \begin_layout Labeling
14658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14662 \begin_inset space ~
14669 This is text with Double underbar on.
14675 arg "font-underunderline"
14679 \begin_inset Newline newline
14682 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14683 about double underbar.
14686 \begin_layout Labeling
14687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14691 \begin_inset space ~
14698 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14704 arg "font-underwave"
14708 \begin_inset Newline newline
14711 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14712 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14715 \begin_layout Labeling
14716 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14720 \begin_inset space ~
14727 This is text with Strikeout on.
14733 arg "font-strikeout"
14737 \begin_inset Newline newline
14740 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14741 changed in the meantime.
14744 \begin_layout Labeling
14745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14749 \begin_inset space ~
14756 This is text with Cross out on.
14759 \begin_inset Newline newline
14762 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14765 \begin_layout Labeling
14766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14773 This is text with Noun on.
14780 , this is a logical attribute.
14781 Normally it's equivalent to
14784 \begin_inset space ~
14793 \begin_layout Standard
14794 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14795 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14797 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14802 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14808 arg "dialog-show character"
14811 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14812 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14815 arg "textstyle-apply"
14819 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14823 \begin_layout Standard
14824 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14831 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14832 (suppose you just set the shape to
14833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14863 \begin_layout Standard
14864 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14872 \begin_inset space ~
14884 \begin_layout Itemize
14890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14897 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14915 \begin_inset Newline newline
14919 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14933 \begin_inset Note Note
14936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14937 For more on phantoms see section
14938 \begin_inset space ~
14942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14944 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14954 \begin_inset Newline newline
14960 \begin_layout Itemize
14965 fonts use characters with serifs.
14966 These are the small
14967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14974 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14975 The following example shows the difference:
14976 \begin_inset Newline newline
14980 \begin_inset Newline newline
14985 text without serifs
14988 \begin_inset Newline newline
14991 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14992 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14999 \begin_layout Itemize
15004 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15005 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15006 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15009 \begin_layout Standard
15010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15017 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15018 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15021 \begin_inset space ~
15026 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15027 the property to be removed.
15028 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15029 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15030 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15048 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15049 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15057 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15061 \begin_inset space ~
15066 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15077 If you, for example, set
15078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15096 \begin_inset space ~
15101 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15110 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15113 \begin_layout Standard
15114 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15115 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15118 \begin_layout Section
15119 Printing and Previewing
15122 \begin_layout Subsection
15126 \begin_layout Standard
15127 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15128 using \SpecialChar LyX
15129 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15130 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15131 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15132 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15134 Additional Features
15139 \begin_layout Standard
15141 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15144 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15145 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15146 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15149 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15150 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15151 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15152 to turn your writing into printable output.
15153 This happens in two stages:
15156 \begin_layout Enumerate
15157 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15158 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15160 a file with the extension,
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 \begin_layout Enumerate
15176 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15177 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15178 to use the commands in the
15182 file to produce printable output.
15185 \begin_layout Subsection
15186 Output file formats
15187 \begin_inset Index idx
15190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15199 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15206 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15207 Simple text (ASCII)
15208 \begin_inset Index idx
15211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15212 File formats ! ASCII
15220 \begin_layout Standard
15221 This file type has the extension
15222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15234 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15245 \begin_layout Standard
15246 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15248 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15249 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15251 \begin_inset space ~
15257 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15258 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15259 bibliography (section
15260 \begin_inset space ~
15264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15266 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15271 If your document includes such material, use
15273 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15274 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15276 \begin_inset space ~
15280 \begin_inset space ~
15284 \begin_inset space ~
15292 \begin_inset space ~
15296 \begin_inset space ~
15302 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15303 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15309 \begin_inset Index idx
15312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15313 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15322 \begin_layout Standard
15323 This file type has the extension
15324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15335 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15338 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15339 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15340 -Errors or to process it manually
15341 with console commands.
15342 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15343 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15344 's temporary directory whenever you
15345 view or export your document.
15348 \begin_layout Standard
15349 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15350 -file using the menu
15352 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15353 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15357 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15358 export variants are explained in section
15359 \begin_inset space ~
15363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15365 reference "subsec:Export"
15372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15374 \begin_inset Index idx
15377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15386 \begin_layout Standard
15387 This file type has the extension
15388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15408 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15409 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15410 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15414 \begin_layout Standard
15415 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15416 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15417 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15418 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15419 when you view the DVI.
15420 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15426 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15427 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15432 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15433 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15435 \begin_inset space ~
15441 The latter option uses the program
15443 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15449 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15452 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15453 font access (see section
15454 \begin_inset space ~
15458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15460 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15465 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15466 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15471 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15473 \begin_inset Index idx
15476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15477 File formats ! PostScript
15485 \begin_layout Standard
15486 This file type has the extension
15487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15499 PostScript was developed by the company
15503 as a printer language.
15504 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15506 PostScript can be seen as a
15507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15510 programming language
15511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15514 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15519 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15526 \begin_inset Index idx
15529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15531 packages ! pstricks
15541 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15545 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15549 Encapsulated PostScript
15550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15553 (EPS, file extension
15554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15566 As \SpecialChar LyX
15567 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15568 convert them in the background to EPS.
15569 If, for example, you have 50
15570 \begin_inset space ~
15573 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15575 \begin_inset space ~
15578 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15579 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15581 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15582 EPS to avoid this problem.
15585 \begin_layout Standard
15586 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15588 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15589 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15595 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15597 \begin_inset Index idx
15600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15607 \begin_inset Index idx
15610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15619 \begin_layout Standard
15620 This file type has the extension
15621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15637 Portable Document Format
15638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15645 was derived from PostScript.
15646 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15655 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15656 looks exactly the same.
15659 \begin_layout Standard
15660 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15664 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15668 (JPG, file extension
15669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15696 Portable Network Graphics
15697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15700 (PNG, file extension
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15713 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15714 converts them in the
15715 background to one of these formats.
15716 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15717 will slow down your workflow.
15718 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15721 \begin_layout Standard
15722 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15724 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15730 \begin_layout Description
15732 \begin_inset space ~
15735 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15739 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15742 \begin_layout Description
15744 \begin_inset space ~
15751 ) This uses the program
15753 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15756 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15759 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15762 is a new engine, derived from
15766 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15767 access (see section
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15774 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15779 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15780 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15785 \begin_layout Description
15787 \begin_inset space ~
15794 ) This uses the program
15799 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15805 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15806 font access (see section
15807 \begin_inset space ~
15811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15813 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15818 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15819 vertically written Japanese.
15822 \begin_layout Description
15824 \begin_inset space ~
15827 (cropped) This is the same as
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15835 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15836 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15837 to generate good-looking
15838 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15841 \begin_layout Description
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15846 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15850 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15854 \begin_layout Description
15856 \begin_inset space ~
15859 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15863 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15864 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15868 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15869 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15872 \begin_layout Standard
15876 \begin_inset space ~
15885 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15886 works without problems.
15887 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15888 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15892 \begin_inset space ~
15900 \begin_inset space ~
15905 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15913 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15915 \begin_inset Index idx
15918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15919 FileFormats ! XHTML
15925 \begin_inset Index idx
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15937 \begin_layout Standard
15938 This file type has the extension
15939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15951 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15952 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15953 When \SpecialChar LyX
15954 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15955 suitable for the purpose.
15956 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15962 between different formats, which are described in section
15964 Math Output in XHTML
15969 \begin_inset space ~
15977 \begin_layout Standard
15978 XHTML output remains
15979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15986 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15987 features are supported yet.
15991 and the World Wide Web
15995 Additional Features
15997 manual, for more information.
16000 \begin_layout Standard
16001 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16003 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16004 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16010 \begin_layout Subsection
16012 \begin_inset Index idx
16015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16024 \begin_layout Standard
16025 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16026 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16035 or use the toolbar button
16042 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16043 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16044 \begin_inset space ~
16048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16050 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16054 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16056 \begin_inset space ~
16060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16062 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16067 Further output formats can be selected via
16069 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16070 View (Other Formats)
16072 or the toolbar button
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16083 viewer window using the menu
16085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16091 Update (Other Formats)
16096 \begin_layout Standard
16097 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16100 To have a real output, export your document.
16103 \begin_layout Section
16104 A few Words about Typography
16105 \begin_inset Index idx
16108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16117 \begin_layout Subsection
16118 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16119 \begin_inset Index idx
16122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 \begin_inset Index idx
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16141 \begin_layout Standard
16142 In \SpecialChar LyX
16144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16155 symbol comes in four variants: the
16172 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16178 \begin_layout Standard
16179 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16189 height_special "totalheight"
16194 backgroundcolor "none"
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16198 \begin_inset Tabular
16199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16201 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16202 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16203 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16204 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16233 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16234 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16273 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16274 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 system key combination
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16301 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16313 and the em dash with
16316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16329 is the Mac label for the right
16338 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16342 \begin_inset space ~
16345 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16357 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16358 and 2014 for the en dash).
16364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16377 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16378 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16400 system key combination or
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16428 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16467 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16473 \begin_layout Standard
16474 Dashes can also be inserted with
16476 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16478 \begin_inset space ~
16481 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 \begin_layout Standard
16497 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16498 mode and has a length of its own.
16499 Here are some examples:
16502 \begin_layout Enumerate
16503 line- and page-breaks
16504 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16514 \begin_layout Enumerate
16516 \begin_inset space ~
16520 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16530 \begin_layout Enumerate
16531 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16532 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16542 \begin_layout Enumerate
16543 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16547 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16557 \begin_layout Standard
16559 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16561 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16562 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16570 \begin_layout Subsection
16571 Dashes and line breaks
16572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16574 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16581 \begin_layout Standard
16582 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16586 \begin_layout Itemize
16587 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16590 \begin_layout Itemize
16591 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16595 \begin_layout Itemize
16596 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16597 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16600 \begin_layout Standard
16601 When using spaced en dashes
16602 \begin_inset space ~
16605 - common in British English
16606 \begin_inset space ~
16609 - line breaks before the dash can be prevented with protected spaces.
16612 \begin_layout Standard
16613 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16614 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16616 optional line breaks with the menu
16618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16619 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16620 Optional line break
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16630 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16631 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16632 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16635 This forces the output of dashes as
16636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16651 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16653 The \SpecialChar TeX
16654 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16655 by an optional line break.
16658 \begin_layout Standard
16662 \begin_layout Enumerate
16663 This results in optional line breaks after
16668 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16675 Prevent Hyphenation
16680 \begin_inset space ~
16696 in \SpecialChar TeX
16702 \begin_layout Itemize
16704 \begin_inset space ~
16708 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16718 height_special "totalheight"
16723 backgroundcolor "none"
16726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16735 \begin_layout Itemize
16739 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16749 height_special "totalheight"
16754 backgroundcolor "none"
16757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16761 \begin_inset space ~
16769 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16770 \begin_inset space ~
16773 – sont très utiles.
16776 \begin_layout Itemize
16783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16792 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16795 \begin_layout Standard
16796 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16797 \begin_inset space ~
16800 – in contrast to an overfull line
16801 \begin_inset space ~
16804 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16809 \begin_layout Enumerate
16810 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16821 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16824 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16825 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16830 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16833 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16842 \begin_layout Enumerate
16858 \begin_layout Enumerate
16859 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16862 \begin_layout Standard
16863 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16865 \begin_inset space ~
16868 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16874 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16876 \begin_inset space ~
16879 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16881 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16886 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16887 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16890 \begin_inset space ~
16893 2.3 provides the option
16895 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16899 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16900 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16904 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16906 \begin_inset space ~
16910 \begin_inset Newline newline
16913 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16917 \begin_layout Itemize
16918 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16920 \begin_inset space ~
16923 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16925 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16927 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16931 \begin_layout Itemize
16932 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16934 \begin_inset space ~
16937 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16938 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16941 \begin_layout Itemize
16942 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16943 documents that follow literal
16944 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16946 \begin_inset space ~
16950 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16951 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16953 \begin_inset space ~
16956 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16959 \begin_layout Subsection
16961 \begin_inset Index idx
16964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16973 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16980 \begin_layout Standard
16981 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16982 but automatically in the output.
16983 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16989 \begin_inset Index idx
16992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16999 following the rules of the document language.
17002 \begin_layout Standard
17004 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17008 font and with unusual constructs, like
17009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17017 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17018 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17019 This is done with the menu
17021 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17022 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17024 \begin_inset space ~
17030 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17032 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17036 \begin_layout Standard
17037 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17038 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17049 would then see the hyphen
17050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17057 as a hyphenation possibility.
17058 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17059 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17063 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17066 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17068 Prevent Hyphenation
17073 \begin_inset space ~
17081 \begin_layout Subsection
17083 \begin_inset Index idx
17086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17096 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17099 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17106 \begin_layout Standard
17107 When \SpecialChar LyX
17108 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17109 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17111 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17117 appropriate amount of space.
17118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17121 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17123 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17124 gets after another word.
17127 \begin_layout Standard
17128 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17129 not work in all cases.
17131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17142 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17143 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17146 \begin_layout Standard
17147 Here are some examples of
17151 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17154 \begin_layout Itemize
17159 \begin_layout Itemize
17164 \begin_layout Standard
17165 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17168 \begin_layout Itemize
17170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17174 this is too much space!
17177 \begin_layout Itemize
17182 \begin_layout Standard
17183 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17186 \begin_layout Standard
17187 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17190 \begin_layout Enumerate
17194 \begin_inset space ~
17199 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17200 \begin_inset space ~
17204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17206 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17211 \begin_inset Index idx
17214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17215 Spaces ! inter-word
17223 \begin_layout Enumerate
17227 \begin_inset space ~
17232 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17233 \begin_inset space ~
17237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17239 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17244 \begin_inset Index idx
17247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17256 \begin_layout Enumerate
17260 \begin_inset space ~
17264 \begin_inset space ~
17268 \begin_inset space ~
17275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17277 \begin_inset space ~
17282 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17283 This function is also bound to
17286 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17292 \begin_layout Standard
17293 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17296 \begin_layout Itemize
17298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17302 \begin_inset space \space{}
17305 this is too much space!
17308 \begin_layout Itemize
17309 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17313 \begin_layout Standard
17314 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17315 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17317 will take care of this.
17320 \begin_layout Standard
17321 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17325 \begin_inset space ~
17331 feature described in the section
17333 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17338 Additional Features
17343 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17345 \begin_inset Index idx
17348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17349 Typography ! Quotation marks
17355 \begin_inset Index idx
17358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17359 Quotation marks | see
17363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17391 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17392 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17393 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17403 The keyboard character,
17407 , generates this automatically.
17410 \begin_layout Standard
17411 You can specify what character the
17415 key produces by using the submenu
17421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17425 \begin_inset Index idx
17428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17429 Document ! Settings
17434 dialog and switching the
17438 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17439 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17441 \begin_inset space ~
17447 \begin_layout Labeling
17448 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17460 \begin_inset space ~
17464 \begin_inset space ~
17468 \begin_inset Quotes els
17472 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17486 \begin_inset Quotes els
17490 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17493 quotation marks (as common, e.
17494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17500 \begin_layout Labeling
17501 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17504 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17508 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17512 \begin_inset space ~
17516 \begin_inset space ~
17520 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17524 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17530 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17534 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17538 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17542 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17545 quotation marks (as common, e.
17546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17552 \begin_layout Labeling
17553 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17556 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17560 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17564 \begin_inset space ~
17568 \begin_inset space ~
17572 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17576 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17582 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17586 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17590 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17594 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17597 quotation marks (as common, e.
17598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17604 \begin_layout Labeling
17605 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17608 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17612 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17616 \begin_inset space ~
17620 \begin_inset space ~
17624 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17628 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17634 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17642 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17646 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17649 quotation marks (as common, e.
17650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17656 \begin_layout Labeling
17657 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17660 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17664 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17668 \begin_inset space ~
17672 \begin_inset space ~
17676 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17680 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17686 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17690 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17694 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17698 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17701 quotation marks (as common, e.
17702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17705 g., in Switzerland)
17708 \begin_layout Labeling
17709 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17712 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17716 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17720 \begin_inset space ~
17724 \begin_inset space ~
17728 \begin_inset Quotes als
17732 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17738 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17742 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17746 \begin_inset Quotes als
17750 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17753 quotation marks (as common, e.
17754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17760 \begin_layout Labeling
17761 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17764 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17768 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17776 \begin_inset space ~
17780 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17784 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17790 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17794 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17798 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17802 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17805 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17808 \begin_layout Labeling
17809 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17812 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17816 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17820 \begin_inset space ~
17824 \begin_inset space ~
17828 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17832 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17838 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17842 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17846 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17850 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17853 quotation marks (as common, e.
17854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17857 g., in Great Britain)
17860 \begin_layout Labeling
17861 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17864 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17868 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17872 \begin_inset space ~
17876 \begin_inset space ~
17880 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17884 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17890 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17894 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17898 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17902 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17905 quotation marks (as common, e.
17906 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17912 \begin_layout Labeling
17913 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17916 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17920 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17924 \begin_inset space ~
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17932 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17936 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17942 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17946 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17950 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17954 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17957 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17963 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17964 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17965 the inner marks differ).
17973 \begin_layout Labeling
17974 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17977 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17981 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17985 \begin_inset space ~
17989 \begin_inset space ~
17993 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17997 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18003 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18007 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18011 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18015 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18018 quotation marks (as common, e.
18019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18025 \begin_layout Labeling
18026 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18029 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18033 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18041 \begin_inset space ~
18045 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18049 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18055 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18059 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18063 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18067 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18070 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18073 \begin_layout Labeling
18074 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18075 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18083 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18089 \begin_inset space ~
18093 \begin_inset space ~
18099 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18107 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18111 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18115 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18119 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18123 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18126 quotation marks (as common, e.
18127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18135 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18136 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18144 \begin_layout Labeling
18145 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18146 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18154 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18160 \begin_inset space ~
18164 \begin_inset space ~
18170 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18178 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18182 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18186 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18190 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18194 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18197 quotation marks (as common, e.
18198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18201 g., in North Korea and China)
18205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18206 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18207 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18216 Inner quotation marks
18220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18221 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18222 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18223 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18231 does not necessarily mean
18232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18240 This is why we call them
18241 \begin_inset Quotes els
18245 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18261 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18263 \begin_inset Quotes els
18267 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18270 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18273 arg "quote-insert inner"
18278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18284 \begin_layout Standard
18285 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18286 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18287 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18288 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18289 If you check the setting
18291 Use dynamic quotation marks
18295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18296 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18299 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18300 they appear in a special color).
18301 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18302 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18307 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18310 \begin_layout Standard
18311 Individual quotation marks (i.
18312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18315 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18316 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18320 \begin_layout Subsection
18322 \begin_inset Index idx
18325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18326 Typography ! Ligatures
18332 \begin_inset Index idx
18335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18366 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18373 \begin_layout Standard
18374 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18375 print them as single characters.
18376 These groups are known as
18381 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18382 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18384 Here are the standard ligatures:
18387 \begin_layout Itemize
18391 \begin_layout Itemize
18395 \begin_layout Itemize
18399 \begin_layout Itemize
18403 \begin_layout Itemize
18407 \begin_layout Standard
18408 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18411 \begin_layout Standard
18412 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18413 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18421 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18437 To break a ligature, use
18439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18440 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18442 \begin_inset space ~
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18460 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18485 \begin_layout Subsection
18487 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18489 \begin_inset Index idx
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18502 \begin_layout Standard
18505 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18506 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18510 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18513 \begin_layout Description
18515 The name of the game.
18518 \begin_layout Description
18520 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18524 \begin_layout Description
18526 The \SpecialChar TeX
18527 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18531 \begin_layout Description
18532 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18533 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18537 \begin_layout Standard
18538 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18544 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18552 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18553 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18554 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18555 converges to the number
18556 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18559 : The actual version is
18560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18568 , the previous one was
18569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18580 \begin_layout Subsection
18582 \begin_inset Index idx
18585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18594 \begin_layout Standard
18595 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18596 space between two words.
18597 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18607 for units use the menu
18609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18610 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18612 \begin_inset space ~
18620 arg "space-insert thin"
18626 \begin_layout Standard
18627 Here is an example to show the differences:
18630 \begin_layout Standard
18631 \begin_inset Tabular
18632 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18633 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18634 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18635 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18642 \begin_inset space ~
18646 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18658 space between number and unit
18665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18674 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18686 half space between number and unit
18699 \begin_layout Subsection
18701 \begin_inset Index idx
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18705 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18713 \begin_layout Standard
18714 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18716 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18717 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18718 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18719 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18720 These bits of text became known as
18731 \begin_layout Standard
18732 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18733 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18734 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18735 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18736 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18737 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18738 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18739 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18740 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18741 \begin_inset Newline newline
18749 \begin_inset Newline newline
18757 \begin_inset Newline newline
18760 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18761 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18762 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18764 \begin_inset space ~
18768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18770 key "latexcompanion"
18776 \begin_inset space ~
18780 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18787 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18788 's page break mechanism.
18791 \begin_layout Chapter
18792 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18795 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18802 \begin_layout Standard
18803 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18806 \begin_inset space ~
18812 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18815 \begin_layout Section
18817 \begin_inset Index idx
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18836 \begin_layout Standard
18838 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18841 \begin_layout Description
18844 \begin_inset space ~
18847 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18848 \begin_inset Newline newline
18852 \begin_inset Note Note
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18856 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18864 \begin_layout Description
18865 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18866 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18867 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18870 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18871 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18873 \begin_inset space ~
18879 \begin_inset Newline newline
18883 \begin_inset Note Comment
18886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18887 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18896 \begin_layout Description
18898 \begin_inset space ~
18901 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18902 set in the document settings under
18904 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18906 \begin_inset space ~
18912 \begin_inset Newline newline
18916 \begin_inset Newline newline
18920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18929 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18930 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18935 of a comment that appears in the output.
18941 \begin_inset Newline newline
18945 \begin_inset Newline newline
18948 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18951 \begin_layout Standard
18952 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18964 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18967 \begin_layout Section
18969 \begin_inset Index idx
18972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18981 name "sec:Footnotes"
18988 \begin_layout Standard
18990 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18993 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18996 or the toolbar button
18999 arg "footnote-insert"
19011 \begin_inset Graphics
19012 filename clipart/footnote.png
19021 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19022 's representation of your footnote.
19032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19051 label, the box will
19055 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19056 Clicking on the box label again will close
19069 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19070 and click on the footnote
19085 \begin_layout Standard
19086 Here is an example footnote:
19094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19095 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19103 \begin_layout Standard
19104 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19105 position where the footnote box is placed.
19106 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19107 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19108 according to the document class.
19110 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19111 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19117 ey are described in the
19120 \begin_inset space ~
19128 \begin_layout Section
19130 \begin_inset Index idx
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19142 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19149 \begin_layout Standard
19150 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19152 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19156 \begin_inset space ~
19161 or the toolbar button
19164 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19190 appearing within your text.
19191 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19192 's representation of your margin
19201 \begin_layout Standard
19202 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19206 \begin_inset Marginal
19209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19211 This is a marginal note.
19219 \begin_layout Standard
19220 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19221 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19222 pages, right on odd pages.
19225 \begin_layout Standard
19226 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_layout Section
19246 Graphics and Images
19247 \begin_inset Index idx
19250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19257 \begin_inset Index idx
19260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19269 name "sec:Graphics"
19276 \begin_layout Standard
19277 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19278 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19281 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19290 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19293 \begin_layout Standard
19294 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19299 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19300 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19302 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19303 \begin_inset space ~
19307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19309 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19316 \begin_layout Standard
19321 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19322 of the image in the output.
19323 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19340 \begin_inset space ~
19344 \begin_inset space ~
19348 \begin_inset space ~
19353 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19354 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19362 \begin_layout Standard
19366 \begin_inset space ~
19370 \begin_inset space ~
19375 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19376 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19378 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19383 \begin_inset space ~
19388 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19389 with the image size is printed.
19392 \begin_layout Standard
19393 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19394 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19396 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19399 \begin_layout Standard
19401 \begin_inset Graphics
19402 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19410 \begin_layout Standard
19411 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19412 the image into a float, see section
19413 \begin_inset space ~
19417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19419 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19426 \begin_layout Subsection
19428 \begin_inset Index idx
19431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19440 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19447 \begin_layout Standard
19448 You can insert images in any known file format.
19449 But as we explained in section
19450 \begin_inset space ~
19454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19456 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19460 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19462 therefore uses the program
19466 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19467 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19468 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19469 \begin_inset space ~
19473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19475 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19482 \begin_layout Standard
19483 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19486 \begin_layout Description
19488 \begin_inset space ~
19491 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19492 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19493 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19497 Graphics Interchange Format
19498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19501 (GIF, file extension
19502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19514 \begin_inset Index idx
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19549 Portable Network Graphics
19550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19553 (PNG, file extension
19554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19566 \begin_inset Index idx
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19601 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19605 (JPG, file extension
19606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19630 \begin_inset Index idx
19633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19664 \begin_layout Description
19666 \begin_inset space ~
19669 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19671 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19672 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19673 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19674 \begin_inset Newline newline
19677 Scalable image formats can be
19678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19681 Scalable Vector Graphics
19682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19685 (SVG, file extension
19686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19698 \begin_inset Index idx
19701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19733 Encapsulated PostScript
19734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19737 (EPS, file extension
19738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19750 \begin_inset Index idx
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19785 Portable Document Format
19786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19789 (PDF, file extension
19790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19802 \begin_inset Index idx
19805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19820 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19821 result will not be scalable.
19822 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19836 \begin_layout Standard
19837 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19844 \begin_layout Subsection
19845 Grouping of Image Settings
19846 \begin_inset Index idx
19849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19850 Images ! Settings grouping
19858 \begin_layout Standard
19859 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19861 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19862 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19864 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19865 need to manually change each of them.
19869 \begin_layout Standard
19870 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19873 \begin_inset space ~
19877 \begin_inset space ~
19889 \begin_inset space ~
19893 \begin_inset space ~
19899 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19900 and checking the name of the desired group.
19903 \begin_layout Section
19905 \begin_inset Index idx
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19915 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19924 \begin_layout Standard
19925 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19928 arg "tabular-insert"
19933 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19937 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19938 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19939 from the rest of the table.
19940 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19941 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19943 Here is an example table:
19946 \begin_layout Standard
19948 \begin_inset Tabular
19949 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19950 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19951 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19952 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 \begin_layout Subsection
20158 \begin_layout Standard
20159 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20162 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20166 This brings up the table dialog.
20167 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20168 cursor is placed currently.
20169 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20170 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20171 done on all of your selection.
20174 \begin_layout Standard
20175 In addition to the table dialog, the
20178 \begin_inset space ~
20183 helps you in setting table properties.
20184 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20187 \begin_layout Standard
20191 \begin_inset space ~
20196 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20197 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20198 current cell respectively.
20199 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20201 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20202 of text, see section
20203 \begin_inset space ~
20207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20209 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20216 \begin_layout Standard
20217 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20218 using the check box
20227 This will merge the cells to
20231 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20232 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20233 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20234 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20235 in the last row without the upper border:
20238 \begin_layout Standard
20240 \begin_inset Tabular
20241 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20242 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20243 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20244 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20245 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20246 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20257 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 \begin_layout Standard
20378 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20379 -arguments for the table.
20380 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20381 explained in the chapter
20388 \begin_inset space ~
20394 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20395 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20396 but are visible in the output.
20399 \begin_layout Standard
20400 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20408 Most DVI-viewers are
20412 able to display rotations.
20420 \begin_layout Standard
20425 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20430 adds lines for all cell borders.
20433 \begin_layout Subsection
20435 \begin_inset Index idx
20438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20439 Tables ! Multi-page
20445 \begin_inset Index idx
20448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 \begin_layout Standard
20458 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20461 \begin_inset space ~
20465 \begin_inset space ~
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20478 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20479 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20482 \begin_layout Description
20487 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20488 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20489 Except for the first page, if
20492 \begin_inset space ~
20500 \begin_layout Description
20504 \begin_inset space ~
20509 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20510 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20513 \begin_layout Description
20518 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20519 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20520 except for the last page, if
20523 \begin_inset space ~
20531 \begin_layout Description
20535 \begin_inset space ~
20540 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20541 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20544 \begin_layout Description
20545 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20546 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20552 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20555 \begin_inset space ~
20563 \begin_layout Standard
20564 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20565 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20566 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20572 In this context, first means first in this order:
20575 \begin_inset space ~
20587 \begin_inset space ~
20592 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20595 \begin_layout Standard
20597 \begin_inset Tabular
20598 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20599 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20600 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20601 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20602 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20603 <row endfirsthead="true">
20604 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20610 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20615 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20624 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 <row endfirsthead="true">
20635 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20655 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <row endhead="true">
20668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <row endhead="true">
20699 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20710 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20731 <row endfoot="true">
20732 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21724 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22652 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22713 <row endlastfoot="true">
22714 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22725 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22734 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 \begin_layout Subsection
22753 \begin_inset Index idx
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22765 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22772 \begin_layout Standard
22773 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22774 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22775 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22776 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22780 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22783 \begin_layout Standard
22784 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22785 for the column in the table dialog.
22786 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22787 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22793 \begin_inset Tabular
22794 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22795 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22796 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22797 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22818 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22943 This is longer now.
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22999 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23000 This is longer now.
23005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 \begin_layout Standard
23032 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23033 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23038 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23039 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23045 Selection with the mouse or with
23049 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23050 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23051 the selection from outside the table.
23054 \begin_layout Section
23056 \begin_inset Index idx
23059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23075 \begin_layout Subsection
23079 \begin_layout Standard
23080 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23081 have a fixed location.
23083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23090 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23098 \begin_inset space ~
23103 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23104 too many notes on the current page.
23107 \begin_layout Standard
23108 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23109 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23110 and pages without text.
23111 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23112 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23113 Floats are therefore numbered.
23114 Referencing is described in section
23115 \begin_inset space ~
23119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23121 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23128 \begin_layout Standard
23129 To insert a float, use the menu
23131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23135 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23136 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23138 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23139 \begin_inset Index idx
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23149 paragraph within the float.
23150 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23151 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23152 left-clicking on the box label.
23153 A closed float box looks like this:
23154 \begin_inset Graphics
23155 filename clipart/float.png
23160 – a gray button with a red label.
23163 \begin_layout Standard
23164 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23166 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23169 \begin_layout Subsection
23171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23173 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23178 \begin_inset Index idx
23181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23182 Floats ! Figure floats
23190 \begin_layout Standard
23192 \begin_inset space ~
23196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23198 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23202 was created using the menu
23204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23205 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23211 arg "float-insert figure"
23215 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23224 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23228 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23229 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23231 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23233 \begin_inset space ~
23241 arg "layout-paragraph"
23247 \begin_layout Standard
23248 \begin_inset Float figure
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23255 \begin_inset Graphics
23256 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23271 name "fig:A-star-in"
23288 \begin_layout Standard
23289 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23290 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23301 ) and refer to it using the menu
23303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23309 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23313 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23314 vague references like
23315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23322 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23323 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23333 For more about cross-references, see section
23334 \begin_inset space ~
23338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23340 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23347 \begin_layout Standard
23348 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23349 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23350 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23351 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23352 as described in section
23353 \begin_inset space ~
23357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23359 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23365 \begin_inset space ~
23369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23371 reference "fig:Two-images"
23375 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23376 You can also set the images one below the other.
23378 \begin_inset space ~
23382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23384 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23391 reference "fig:Star"
23395 are the subfigures.
23398 \begin_layout Standard
23399 \begin_inset Float figure
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23409 \begin_inset Float figure
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23415 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23420 name "fig:Undefinable"
23432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23433 \begin_inset Graphics
23434 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23450 \begin_inset Float figure
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23456 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23459 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 \begin_inset Graphics
23475 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23487 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23499 name "fig:Two-images"
23516 \begin_layout Subsection
23518 \begin_inset Index idx
23521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 Floats ! Table floats
23530 \begin_layout Standard
23531 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23534 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23537 or the toolbar button
23540 arg "float-insert table"
23544 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23545 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23546 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23548 \begin_inset space ~
23552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23554 reference "tab:Table-float"
23561 \begin_layout Standard
23562 \begin_inset Float table
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23573 name "tab:Table-float"
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 \begin_inset Tabular
23588 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23589 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23590 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23591 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23740 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23743 \end{array}\right]$
23751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23785 \begin_layout Subsection
23787 \begin_inset Index idx
23790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23799 \begin_layout Standard
23801 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23802 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23803 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23805 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23813 \begin_inset space ~
23821 \begin_layout Section
23823 \begin_inset Index idx
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 \begin_layout Standard
23837 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23839 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23840 \begin_inset space \space{}
23847 \begin_layout Standard
23848 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23849 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23855 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23856 and its alignment within the page.
23859 \begin_layout Standard
23861 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23871 height_special "totalheight"
23876 backgroundcolor "none"
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 This is a minipage.
23883 The text is set in an italic style.
23886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23889 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23890 another formatting.
23898 \begin_layout Standard
23899 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23902 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23906 as described in section
23907 \begin_inset space ~
23911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23913 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23918 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23924 \begin_layout Standard
23925 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23935 height_special "totalheight"
23940 backgroundcolor "none"
23943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23945 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23951 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23955 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23965 height_special "totalheight"
23970 backgroundcolor "none"
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23975 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23983 \begin_layout Standard
23984 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23990 \begin_layout Standard
23991 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23993 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24000 \begin_inset space ~
24008 \begin_layout Chapter
24009 Mathematical Formulas
24010 \begin_inset Index idx
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 \begin_inset Index idx
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24054 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24061 \begin_layout Standard
24062 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24067 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24070 \begin_layout Section
24072 \begin_inset Index idx
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24084 \begin_layout Standard
24085 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24098 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24100 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24101 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24102 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24110 \begin_layout Standard
24111 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24115 \begin_inset space ~
24120 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24123 \begin_layout Standard
24124 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24125 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24128 \begin_layout Standard
24129 This is a line with an inline formula
24130 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24136 \begin_layout Standard
24137 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24138 paragraph, like this one:
24139 \begin_inset Formula
24146 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24149 \begin_layout Standard
24151 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24153 For example, typing
24154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24167 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24168 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24172 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24175 \begin_inset space ~
24183 \begin_layout Subsection
24184 Navigating in Formulas
24185 \begin_inset Index idx
24188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24197 \begin_layout Standard
24198 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24199 achieved with the arrow keys.
24201 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24202 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24207 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24208 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24212 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24216 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24219 \end{array}\right]$
24227 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24232 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24233 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24236 \begin_layout Standard
24241 , printed in this document as
24242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24246 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24253 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24254 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24255 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24260 For example, if you want
24261 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24269 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24279 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24283 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24288 , since in the latter case only the
24291 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24296 will be under the square root sign:
24297 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24303 \begin_layout Standard
24304 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24306 \begin_inset Formula
24308 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24317 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24318 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24321 \begin_layout Subsection
24325 \begin_layout Standard
24326 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24327 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24331 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24332 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24333 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24334 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24335 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24339 \begin_layout Subsection
24340 Exponents and Subscripts
24341 \begin_inset Index idx
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 \begin_inset Index idx
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24363 \begin_layout Standard
24364 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24367 arg "math-superscript"
24373 arg "math-subscript"
24376 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24378 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24381 , type in a formula
24384 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24394 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24400 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24404 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24410 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24416 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24425 , you have to use an extra
24429 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24430 For example, if you want
24431 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24437 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24443 Subscripts are similar: To get
24444 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24450 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24458 \begin_layout Subsection
24460 \begin_inset Index idx
24463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 \begin_layout Standard
24473 Create a fraction either with the command
24479 or by using the icon
24482 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24488 \begin_inset space ~
24494 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24495 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24496 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24501 To move back up, press
24506 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24507 \begin_inset Formula
24509 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24512 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24520 \begin_layout Subsection
24522 \begin_inset Index idx
24525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 \begin_layout Standard
24535 Roots can be created using the
24538 \begin_inset space ~
24546 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24552 arg "math-insert \\root"
24574 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24580 always produces a square root.
24583 \begin_layout Subsection
24584 Operators with Limits
24585 \begin_inset Index idx
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24595 \begin_inset Index idx
24598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24607 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24614 \begin_layout Standard
24616 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24620 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24623 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24624 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24625 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24626 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24627 The sum operator will automatically place its
24628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24635 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24637 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24641 \begin_inset Formula
24643 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24648 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24655 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24656 behind the operator and using the menu
24658 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24659 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24661 \begin_inset space ~
24665 \begin_inset space ~
24679 \begin_layout Standard
24680 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24689 \begin_inset Index idx
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24699 \begin_inset Formula
24701 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24706 which will place the
24707 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24719 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24720 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24726 \begin_layout Standard
24727 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24734 Have a look at section
24735 \begin_inset space ~
24739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24741 reference "subsec:Functions"
24745 for an explanation of function macros.
24748 \begin_layout Subsection
24750 \begin_inset Index idx
24753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 \begin_layout Standard
24763 Most math symbols can be found in the
24766 \begin_inset space ~
24771 under one of several categories; including
24788 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24792 \begin_layout Standard
24793 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24794 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24795 don't have to use the
24798 \begin_inset space ~
24803 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24805 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24808 \begin_layout Subsection
24810 \begin_inset Index idx
24813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 \begin_layout Standard
24823 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24829 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24835 \begin_inset space ~
24843 arg "math-insert \\space"
24847 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24848 For example, the sequence
24853 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24856 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24858 \begin_inset Graphics
24859 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24864 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24865 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24866 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24867 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24868 , because they are negative
24870 Here are two examples:
24873 \begin_layout Standard
24883 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24889 \begin_layout Standard
24899 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24905 \begin_layout Subsection
24907 \begin_inset Index idx
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24919 name "subsec:Functions"
24926 \begin_layout Standard
24930 \begin_inset space ~
24935 contains under the button
24938 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24941 a number of function macros, such as
24942 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24946 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24954 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24961 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24962 avoid confusions, because
24963 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24967 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24973 \begin_layout Standard
24974 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24976 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24980 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24986 \begin_layout Standard
24987 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24988 are placed, as described in section
24989 \begin_inset space ~
24993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24995 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25002 \begin_layout Subsection
25004 \begin_inset Index idx
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25016 \begin_layout Standard
25017 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25019 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25020 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25021 commands, for example, to enter
25022 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25025 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25026 Our example is entered by typing
25031 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25038 \begin_inset space ~
25042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25044 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25048 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25051 \begin_layout Standard
25052 \begin_inset Float table
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25058 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25063 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25067 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25077 \begin_inset Tabular
25078 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25079 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25080 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25166 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25436 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25490 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25598 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25643 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25664 \begin_layout Standard
25665 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25668 \begin_inset space ~
25676 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25679 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25683 \begin_layout Section
25684 Brackets and Delimiters
25685 \begin_inset Index idx
25688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25695 \begin_inset Index idx
25698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25707 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25714 \begin_layout Standard
25715 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25717 For some purposes, using just the keys
25722 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25723 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25724 toolbar delimiter icon
25727 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25731 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25732 \begin_inset Formula
25734 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25742 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25743 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25747 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25750 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25756 \begin_inset Formula
25758 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25766 \begin_layout Standard
25767 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25768 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25772 \begin_layout Standard
25773 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25774 left side and right side.
25775 If you use the option
25778 \begin_inset space ~
25783 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25784 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25786 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25791 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25792 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25795 \begin_layout Standard
25796 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25797 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25798 is to go inside the brackets.
25799 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25804 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25805 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25806 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25810 arg "math-delim ( )"
25816 \begin_layout Section
25817 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25818 \begin_inset Index idx
25821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 \begin_inset Index idx
25831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25838 \begin_inset Index idx
25841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25842 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25850 \begin_layout Standard
25851 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25855 \begin_inset space ~
25863 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25867 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25868 Here is an example:
25869 \begin_inset Formula
25871 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25880 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25881 \begin_inset space ~
25885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25887 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25892 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25893 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25894 This alignment is set in the box
25899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25948 for every column as default.
25949 For example, the sequence
25950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25961 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25962 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25963 corresponds to the relevant column.
25964 The result will look like this:
25965 \begin_inset Formula
25968 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25969 column & has & has\,right\\
25970 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25979 \begin_layout Standard
25980 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25983 arg "newline-insert newline"
25986 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25987 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25989 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25992 or the math toolbar.
25995 \begin_layout Standard
25996 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25997 It can be created with the menu
25999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26000 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26002 \begin_inset space ~
26014 Here is an example:
26015 \begin_inset Formula
26029 \begin_layout Standard
26030 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26033 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26036 arg "newline-insert newline"
26040 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26045 arg "newline-insert newline"
26048 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26056 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26057 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26058 A new row is created by every further entry of
26061 arg "newline-insert newline"
26065 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26066 Here is an example:
26067 \begin_inset Formula
26069 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26070 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26075 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26076 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26077 \begin_inset Formula
26079 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26095 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26096 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26099 reference "eq:asquared"
26104 The other types are described in section
26105 \begin_inset space ~
26109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26111 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26118 \begin_layout Section
26119 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26120 \begin_inset Index idx
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26124 Math ! Formula numbering
26130 \begin_inset Index idx
26133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26134 Math ! Referencing formulas
26140 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26142 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26150 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26152 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26153 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26155 \begin_inset space ~
26159 \begin_inset space ~
26167 arg "math-number-toggle"
26171 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26172 within parentheses.
26173 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26174 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26175 the document class.
26176 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26177 separated by a dot:
26178 \begin_inset Formula
26188 arg "math-number-toggle"
26191 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26192 You can only number displayed formulas.
26195 \begin_layout Standard
26196 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26198 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26199 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26201 \begin_inset space ~
26205 \begin_inset space ~
26213 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26216 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26217 \begin_inset Formula
26220 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26226 To number all lines use the shortcut
26229 arg "math-number-toggle"
26235 \begin_layout Standard
26236 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26239 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26240 A label is inserted with the menu
26242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26251 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26252 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26253 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26265 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26266 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26267 We inserted in the following example the label
26268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26275 in the second line:
26276 \begin_inset Formula
26278 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26279 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26284 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26285 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26286 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26290 \begin_inset space ~
26298 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26302 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26303 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26304 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26305 as the formula number:
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26312 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26319 \begin_layout Standard
26320 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26321 's cross-reference box are described in section
26322 \begin_inset space ~
26326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26328 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26333 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26341 \begin_layout Section
26342 User defined math macros
26343 \begin_inset Index idx
26346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26355 \begin_layout Standard
26357 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26358 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26359 Math macros are explained in section
26362 \begin_inset space ~
26374 \begin_layout Section
26378 \begin_layout Subsection
26380 \begin_inset Index idx
26383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26392 \begin_layout Standard
26393 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26394 To set a font in a formula, use the
26397 \begin_inset space ~
26405 arg "math-insert \\font"
26408 , or enter its command, listed in table
26409 \begin_inset space ~
26413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26415 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26422 \begin_layout Standard
26423 \begin_inset Float table
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26429 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26434 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26438 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26448 \begin_inset Tabular
26449 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26450 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26451 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26452 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26484 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26571 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26598 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26659 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 \begin_layout Standard
26721 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26745 \begin_layout Standard
26746 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26747 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26752 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26753 space when you need a space in the box.
26754 Here is an example where
26755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26766 denotes the set of numbers:
26767 \begin_inset Formula
26769 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26777 \begin_layout Standard
26778 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26779 You can, for example, put a character in
26788 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26792 \begin_inset Newline newline
26795 So it is better not to use this feature.
26798 \begin_layout Standard
26799 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26800 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26804 \begin_inset Newline newline
26807 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26813 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26814 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26820 \begin_layout Standard
26827 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26830 \begin_layout Standard
26831 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26833 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26834 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26836 \begin_inset space ~
26844 \begin_layout Subsection
26846 \begin_inset Index idx
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26858 \begin_layout Standard
26859 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26861 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26865 \begin_inset space ~
26869 \begin_inset space ~
26877 \begin_inset space ~
26885 arg "math-insert \\font"
26889 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26890 in black instead of blue.
26891 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26892 Here is an example:
26893 \begin_inset Formula
26896 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26897 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26906 \begin_layout Subsection
26908 \begin_inset Index idx
26911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26920 \begin_layout Standard
26921 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26922 automatically chosen in most situations.
26940 For most characters,
26948 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26949 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26954 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26955 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26956 thinks are appropriate.
26957 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26960 arg "math-insert \\style"
26964 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26965 For example, you can set
26966 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26969 , which is normally in
26978 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26982 The four styles are used in the following example:
26985 \begin_layout Standard
26986 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26990 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26994 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26998 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27004 \begin_layout Standard
27005 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27006 is set in a particular size with the menu
27008 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27010 \begin_inset space ~
27015 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27016 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27017 will be adjusted to correspond.
27018 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27029 \begin_layout Standard
27033 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27039 \begin_layout Section
27040 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27042 \begin_inset Index idx
27045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27052 \begin_inset Index idx
27055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27064 \begin_layout Standard
27066 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27067 that are in common use.
27070 \begin_layout Subsection
27071 Enabling AMS-Support
27074 \begin_layout Standard
27075 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27076 the document by selecting the checkbox
27079 \begin_inset space ~
27083 \begin_inset space ~
27087 \begin_inset space ~
27094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27098 \begin_inset Index idx
27101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 Document ! Settings
27110 \begin_inset space ~
27116 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27117 -errors in formulas,
27118 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27121 \begin_layout Subsection
27123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27125 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27130 \begin_inset Index idx
27133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27134 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27142 \begin_layout Standard
27143 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27144 provides a selection of different formula types.
27146 allows you to choose between
27167 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27168 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27175 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27178 \begin_layout Chapter
27182 \begin_layout Section
27184 \begin_inset Index idx
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27196 name "sec:Cross-References"
27203 \begin_layout Standard
27204 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27205 's strengths is cross-references.
27206 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27208 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27209 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27210 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27213 \begin_layout Enumerate
27217 \begin_layout Enumerate
27218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27220 name "enu:Second-item"
27227 \begin_layout Enumerate
27231 \begin_layout Standard
27232 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27237 or by pressing the toolbar button
27244 A gray label box like this:
27245 \begin_inset Graphics
27246 filename clipart/label.png
27250 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27252 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27287 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27288 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27304 \begin_layout Standard
27305 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27310 or the toolbar button
27313 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27317 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27318 \begin_inset Graphics
27319 filename clipart/reference.png
27323 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27325 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27338 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27342 \begin_layout Standard
27343 As an alternative to
27345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27348 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27353 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27354 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27368 \begin_layout Standard
27369 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27370 \begin_inset space ~
27374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27376 reference "enu:Second-item"
27383 \begin_layout Standard
27384 It is recommended to use a protected space
27388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27389 described in section
27390 \begin_inset space ~
27394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27396 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27405 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27406 line breaks between them.
27409 \begin_layout Standard
27410 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27413 \begin_layout Description
27414 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27417 reference "fig:Two-images"
27424 \begin_layout Description
27425 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27426 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27438 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27445 \begin_layout Description
27446 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27447 \begin_inset space ~
27451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27452 LatexCommand pageref
27453 reference "fig:Two-images"
27460 \begin_layout Description
27462 \begin_inset space ~
27466 \begin_inset space ~
27469 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27471 LatexCommand vpageref
27472 reference "fig:Two-images"
27477 \begin_inset Newline newline
27480 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27481 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27482 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27483 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27484 it prints “on the next page”.
27485 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27488 \begin_layout Description
27490 \begin_inset space ~
27494 \begin_inset space ~
27498 \begin_inset space ~
27501 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27504 reference "fig:Two-images"
27509 \begin_inset Newline newline
27512 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27518 ; otherwise it behaves like
27522 \begin_inset space ~
27526 \begin_inset space ~
27535 \begin_layout Description
27537 \begin_inset space ~
27540 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27541 \begin_inset Newline newline
27545 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27553 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27563 \begin_inset Index idx
27566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27568 packages ! prettyref
27574 \begin_inset Index idx
27577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27579 packages ! refstyle
27590 \begin_inset Newline newline
27593 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27594 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27597 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27602 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27610 is the default and preferred because
27614 supports only English documents.
27615 The format is specified by using the command
27627 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27628 preamble of the document.
27629 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27647 \begin_inset Newline newline
27654 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27659 \begin_inset Newline newline
27670 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27671 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27673 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27674 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27679 , you might do so as follows:
27680 \begin_inset Newline newline
27687 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27692 \begin_inset Newline newline
27695 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27696 the package documentation
27697 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27699 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27705 \begin_inset Newline newline
27716 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27723 \begin_layout Description
27725 \begin_inset space ~
27728 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27730 LatexCommand nameref
27731 reference "fig:Two-images"
27738 \begin_layout Description
27740 \begin_inset space ~
27743 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27744 label for the reference:
27745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27746 LatexCommand labelonly
27747 reference "fig:Two-images"
27752 \begin_inset Newline newline
27755 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27756 Code, if you want to issue a command
27757 that \SpecialChar LyX
27763 , then you may want to use the
27766 \begin_inset space ~
27771 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27781 This is the form needed for e.
27782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27786 \begin_inset space \space{}
27793 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27794 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27796 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27800 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27804 \begin_layout Standard
27805 You can only use the style
27809 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27813 is always possible.
27816 \begin_layout Standard
27817 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27818 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27820 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27821 \begin_inset space ~
27825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27827 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27834 \begin_layout Standard
27835 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27839 \begin_inset space ~
27843 \begin_inset space ~
27848 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27849 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27852 \begin_inset space ~
27857 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27858 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27861 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27867 \begin_layout Standard
27868 You can change labels at any time.
27869 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27870 do not need to think about this.
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27874 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27876 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27880 \begin_layout Standard
27881 References are described in detail in the section
27882 \begin_inset space ~
27892 \begin_inset space ~
27900 \begin_layout Section
27901 Table of Contents and other Listings
27902 \begin_inset Index idx
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 \begin_inset Index idx
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 Navigating ! Outline
27922 \begin_inset Index idx
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27941 \begin_layout Subsection
27943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27945 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27952 \begin_layout Standard
27953 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27956 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27958 \begin_inset space ~
27962 \begin_inset space ~
27968 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27970 If you click on it, the
27974 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27975 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27976 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27978 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27980 \begin_inset space ~
27985 that is described in section
27986 \begin_inset space ~
27990 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27992 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27999 \begin_layout Standard
28000 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28001 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28003 \begin_inset space ~
28007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28009 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28013 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28015 \begin_inset space ~
28019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28021 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28025 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28027 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28030 \begin_layout Subsection
28031 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28032 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28034 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28041 \begin_layout Standard
28042 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28044 You can insert them via the
28046 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28050 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28053 \begin_layout Section
28054 URLs and Hyperlinks
28055 \begin_inset Index idx
28058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 \begin_inset Index idx
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 \begin_layout Subsection
28079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28088 \begin_layout Standard
28089 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28097 \begin_layout Standard
28098 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28100 \begin_inset Flex URL
28103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 \begin_layout Standard
28114 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28120 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28124 \begin_layout Standard
28125 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28133 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28142 \begin_layout Subsection
28144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28146 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28153 \begin_layout Standard
28154 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28159 or with the toolbar button
28166 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28175 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28176 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28177 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28179 name "LyX's homepage"
28180 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28185 , an Email address like this:
28186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28188 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28189 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28195 , or a link to a file.
28200 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28208 \begin_layout Standard
28209 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28222 to the link target.
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28227 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28228 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28229 the text style dialog.
28230 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28234 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28236 name "LyX's homepage"
28237 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28245 \begin_layout Standard
28246 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28250 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28252 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28253 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28257 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28259 \begin_inset Newline newline
28267 \begin_inset Newline newline
28274 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28277 \begin_layout Section
28279 \begin_inset Index idx
28282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28291 name "sec:Appendices"
28298 \begin_layout Standard
28299 Appendices are created with the menu
28301 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28303 \begin_inset space ~
28307 \begin_inset space ~
28313 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28314 as the appendix part of the book.
28315 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28318 \begin_layout Standard
28319 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28320 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28321 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28322 and the subsection number.
28323 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28327 \begin_layout Standard
28329 \begin_inset space ~
28333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28335 reference "chap:Credits"
28340 \begin_inset space ~
28344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28346 reference "subsec:Export"
28353 \begin_layout Section
28355 \begin_inset Index idx
28358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28367 name "sec:Bibliography"
28374 \begin_layout Standard
28375 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28377 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28378 \begin_inset space ~
28382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28384 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28391 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28396 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28397 \begin_inset space ~
28401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28403 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28408 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28409 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28410 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28414 using a bibliography database.
28417 \begin_layout Standard
28418 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28419 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28423 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28424 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28425 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28426 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28427 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28430 \begin_layout Subsection
28431 The Bibliography Environment
28432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28434 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28441 \begin_layout Standard
28446 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28448 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28457 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28459 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28460 of ASCII characters only.
28464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28469 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28475 \begin_inset Newline newline
28479 \begin_inset Flex URL
28482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28496 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28506 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28507 \begin_inset Newline newline
28514 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28515 the number of the entry.
28520 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28529 \begin_layout Standard
28530 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28535 or the toolbar button
28538 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28542 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28543 containing the available citations.
28544 Select one or more keys from the list and
28554 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28555 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28559 \begin_layout Standard
28560 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28561 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28562 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28574 \begin_layout Standard
28578 Companion Second Edition
28581 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28583 key "latexcompanion"
28591 \begin_layout Standard
28592 The \SpecialChar LyX
28593 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28604 \begin_layout Standard
28605 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28612 \begin_inset Index idx
28615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28623 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28635 Author A and Author B(Year)
28636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28643 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28645 Then, if you select
28648 \begin_inset space ~
28653 in the document settings
28654 \begin_inset Index idx
28657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28658 Document ! Settings
28665 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28667 \begin_inset space ~
28673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28675 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28682 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28685 \begin_layout Standard
28686 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28689 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28691 \begin_inset space ~
28699 arg "layout-paragraph"
28703 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28706 \begin_layout Subsection
28707 Bibliography databases
28708 \begin_inset Index idx
28711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28712 Bibliography ! Databases
28718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28720 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28727 \begin_layout Standard
28728 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28736 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28737 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28742 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28744 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28745 your working field in a database.
28746 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28747 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28748 list for that document.
28749 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28753 \begin_layout Standard
28754 The database is a text file with the file extension
28755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28766 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28767 The format is explained in
28768 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28775 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28777 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28779 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28785 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28786 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28787 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28789 \begin_inset Flex URL
28792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28794 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28802 \begin_layout Standard
28804 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28805 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28806 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28808 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28810 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28811 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28812 Those are addressed by
28817 \begin_inset Index idx
28820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28822 packages ! biblatex
28828 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28829 (although it has been significantly
28830 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28840 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28841 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28842 might conversely fail to correctly
28843 handle databases that use specific
28852 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28857 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28862 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28868 \begin_inset Index idx
28871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28872 Document ! Settings
28884 \begin_inset space ~
28889 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28898 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28900 \begin_inset Index idx
28903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28904 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28913 \begin_layout Standard
28914 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28917 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28922 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28924 \begin_inset space ~
28930 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28931 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28939 Add bibliography to TOC
28941 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28946 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28947 in the document or just the cited references.
28950 \begin_layout Standard
28951 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28952 style file is a text file with the file extension
28953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28964 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28965 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28966 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28967 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28969 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28975 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28976 \begin_inset Newline newline
28980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28982 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28992 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28997 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29001 \begin_layout Standard
29002 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29007 \begin_inset Index idx
29010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29011 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29017 \begin_inset Index idx
29020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29022 packages ! biblatex
29030 \begin_layout Standard
29031 Accessing a database via
29035 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29043 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29045 \begin_inset space ~
29051 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29052 you cannot select a
29057 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29061 \begin_layout Standard
29066 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29079 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29080 file (text file with the file extension
29081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29092 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29093 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29095 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29099 \begin_layout Standard
29104 styles are not set in the
29107 \begin_inset space ~
29112 dialog, but in the document settings.
29113 \begin_inset Index idx
29116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29117 Document ! Settings
29122 However, in the dialog in the
29126 field, which is only visible if you use
29130 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29131 example how its heading will appear).
29132 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29137 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29147 \begin_layout Standard
29148 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29149 \begin_inset space ~
29153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29155 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29165 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29166 Bibliography Processors
29169 \begin_layout Standard
29170 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29171 uses a bibliography processor,
29172 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29173 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29174 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29176 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29177 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29180 \begin_layout Standard
29181 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29183 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29184 You can do this on a general level in
29186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29188 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29191 or for individual documents in
29193 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29194 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29198 The following variants are available by default:
29201 \begin_layout Description
29202 biber a specific, modern processor
29203 \begin_inset Index idx
29206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29213 developed exclusively for
29217 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29223 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29228 makes use of; if you use the
29232 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29239 \begin_layout Description
29240 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29241 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29242 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29246 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29249 \begin_layout Description
29250 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29251 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29255 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29259 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29263 features are supported.
29266 \begin_layout Standard
29267 By default (with the
29273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29287 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29288 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29289 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29292 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29293 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29306 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29307 -based bibliography styles).
29308 This should suit most needs.
29311 \begin_layout Standard
29312 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29313 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29314 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29319 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29320 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29321 You can adjust it in
29323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29324 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29325 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29331 \begin_layout Standard
29332 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29333 can add below the selection.
29334 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29335 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29341 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29351 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29355 \begin_layout Standard
29357 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29359 These are explained in detail in section
29361 Customizing Bibliographies
29365 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29370 Additional Features
29375 \begin_layout Subsection
29377 \begin_inset Index idx
29380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29381 Bibliography ! Citation format
29387 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29389 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29396 \begin_layout Standard
29397 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29398 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29402 \begin_inset space \space{}
29405 numerical citation (as
29406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29413 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29421 ) or author-year citations (as
29422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29431 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29435 \begin_layout Standard
29436 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29440 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29444 \begin_inset Index idx
29447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29448 Document ! Settings
29453 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29459 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29460 labels, is there to use
29463 \begin_inset space ~
29474 \begin_inset space ~
29479 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29482 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29489 \begin_layout Standard
29490 With a bibliography database (see
29491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29493 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29500 ) one has in contrary to the
29504 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29505 These style formats are available:
29508 \begin_layout Description
29510 \begin_inset space ~
29513 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29514 -based approached without any additional packages
29515 (simple numeric citations).
29518 \begin_layout Description
29519 Biblatex loads the package
29524 \begin_inset Index idx
29527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 packages ! biblatex
29534 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29536 Biblatex citation style
29540 Biblatex bibliography style
29543 Options to the package
29547 can be entered in the
29554 \begin_layout Description
29556 \begin_inset space ~
29560 \begin_inset space ~
29563 mode) loads the package
29567 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29568 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29580 behavior very closely.
29585 this option has some additional styles.
29590 styles are also supported by this variant.
29593 \begin_layout Description
29595 \begin_inset space ~
29598 (BibTeX) loads the package
29603 \begin_inset Index idx
29606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29613 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29616 \begin_layout Description
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29621 (BibTeX) loads the package
29626 \begin_inset Index idx
29629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29636 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29639 \begin_layout Standard
29648 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29650 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29659 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29661 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29662 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29664 Biblatex citation style
29667 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29673 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29679 are available in the
29684 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29685 a name prefix such as
29686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29701 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29706 \begin_inset space \space{}
29710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29728 \begin_inset space \space{}
29731 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29737 \begin_inset space \space{}
29741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29753 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29757 \begin_inset space ~
29765 \begin_inset space ~
29771 Here is a simple example where the text
29772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29776 \begin_inset space ~
29780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29783 appears after the reference:
29786 \begin_layout Quote
29788 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29791 key "latexcompanion"
29799 \begin_layout Standard
29800 All styles except for
29804 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29814 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29818 \begin_layout Standard
29819 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29820 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29821 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29826 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29827 multi-citation (so-called
29828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29831 qualified citation lists
29832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29838 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29843 dialog will display three columns in the field
29850 \begin_inset space ~
29858 \begin_inset space ~
29866 \begin_inset space ~
29872 If you double-click on an item's
29875 \begin_inset space ~
29883 \begin_inset space ~
29888 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29891 General text before
29897 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29900 \begin_layout Section
29902 \begin_inset Index idx
29905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29922 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29926 \begin_inset space ~
29931 or the toolbar button
29938 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29939 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29940 by \SpecialChar LyX
29941 as the index entry.
29944 \begin_layout Standard
29945 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29948 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29950 \begin_inset space ~
29956 A light blue box labeled
29957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29968 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29969 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29973 \begin_layout Standard
29974 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29975 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29976 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29977 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29981 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29989 \begin_layout Subsection
29990 Grouping Index Entries
29991 \begin_inset Index idx
29994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30003 \begin_layout Standard
30004 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30006 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30007 lists under the entry
30008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30016 First we create the entry
30017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30025 \begin_inset space ~
30029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30031 reference "subsec:Lists"
30036 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30037 \begin_inset space ~
30041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30043 reference "sec:Itemize"
30047 , we insert the command
30050 \begin_layout Standard
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30066 \begin_layout Standard
30067 for the enumerated list in section
30068 \begin_inset space ~
30072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30074 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30081 \begin_layout Standard
30082 The exclamation mark
30083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30090 marks the grouping levels.
30091 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30092 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30093 If we don't have an index entry for
30094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30101 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30104 \begin_layout Subsection
30106 \begin_inset Index idx
30109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30110 Index ! Page ranges
30118 \begin_layout Standard
30119 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30121 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30122 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30123 an index entry in section
30124 \begin_inset space ~
30128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30130 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30137 \begin_layout Standard
30140 Paragraph environments|(
30143 \begin_layout Standard
30144 and another entry at the end of section
30145 \begin_inset space ~
30149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30151 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30161 Paragraph environments|)
30164 \begin_layout Standard
30166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30189 respectively start and end the index range.
30190 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30191 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30192 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30193 An example is the index entry
30194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30197 Document ! Settings
30198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30204 \begin_layout Subsection
30206 \begin_inset Index idx
30209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30210 Index ! Cross referencing
30218 \begin_layout Standard
30219 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30220 We referred for example in the index entry
30221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30229 \begin_inset space ~
30233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30235 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30239 ) to the index entry
30240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30247 in the same section using the entry
30250 \begin_layout Standard
30253 GIF|see{Image formats}
30256 \begin_layout Standard
30257 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30259 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30260 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30263 \begin_layout Subsection
30265 \begin_inset Index idx
30268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30269 Index ! Entry order
30277 \begin_layout Standard
30278 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30279 follow the rules for the index order.
30280 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30286 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30288 \begin_inset space ~
30292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30294 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30303 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30304 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30329 \begin_inset Index idx
30332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30333 Dummy entries ! maïs
30339 \begin_inset Index idx
30342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 Dummy entries ! maître
30349 \begin_inset Index idx
30352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30353 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30358 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30359 maïs, maison, maître.
30360 To achieve this, we use the command
30363 \begin_layout Standard
30366 previous entry@current entry
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30370 In our case we want to have
30371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30386 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30389 \begin_layout Standard
30395 \begin_layout Standard
30396 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30397 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30399 See the next subsection for an example.
30402 \begin_layout Subsection
30404 \begin_inset Index idx
30407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30408 Index ! Entry layout
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30417 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30418 \begin_inset Index idx
30421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30424 This is an italic dummy entry
30429 You can also format the page number using the character
30430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30437 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30438 -command without a backslash.
30439 We can write for example
30442 \begin_layout Standard
30445 italic page number:|textit
30448 \begin_layout Standard
30449 to get the page number in italic.
30450 \begin_inset Index idx
30453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30454 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30459 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30460 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30478 \begin_inset space ~
30484 Have a look at section
30485 \begin_inset space ~
30489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30491 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30495 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30499 \begin_layout Standard
30500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30508 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30512 to generate the index, see section
30513 \begin_inset space ~
30517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30519 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30528 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30533 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30534 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30537 key "latexcompanion"
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30553 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30554 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30555 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30556 If so, put the following in the preamble
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30571 \begin_layout Standard
30575 \begin_layout Standard
30581 \begin_layout Standard
30582 in the index entry.
30583 \begin_inset Index idx
30586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30587 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30592 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30593 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30594 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30597 \begin_layout Standard
30598 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30599 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30600 a bold font for all index entries.
30601 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30613 documentation for details,
30614 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30616 key "makeindex,xindy"
30624 \begin_layout Subsection
30626 \begin_inset Index idx
30629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30636 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30638 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30645 \begin_layout Standard
30646 If the index generation program
30650 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30651 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30655 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30656 distribution, is used.
30660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30665 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30666 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30667 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30668 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30669 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30679 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30681 dialog, see section
30682 \begin_inset space ~
30686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30688 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30693 The available options are listed and explained in
30694 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30696 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30702 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30706 \begin_layout Standard
30707 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30708 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30711 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30712 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30716 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30717 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30720 \begin_layout Subsection
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30725 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30726 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30734 next to the standard index.
30736 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30737 that add this feature.
30744 \begin_inset Index idx
30747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30749 packages ! splitidx
30754 package to generate multiple indexes.
30755 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30761 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30763 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30771 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30772 style, but it also includes
30773 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30774 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30782 \begin_layout Standard
30783 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30784 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30786 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30787 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30790 and select the option
30792 Use multiple Indexes
30799 already contains the standard index
30800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30808 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30809 also appear as a heading) to the
30813 input field and press the
30818 The new index now also appears in the list.
30819 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30820 label color to the new index.
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30824 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30834 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30835 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30836 are additional features:
30839 \begin_layout Itemize
30840 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30841 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30844 \begin_layout Itemize
30845 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30846 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30851 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30852 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30853 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30854 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30857 \begin_layout Itemize
30862 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30863 code in the name of the index.
30866 \begin_layout Section
30867 Nomenclature/Glossary
30868 \begin_inset Index idx
30871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 \begin_inset Index idx
30881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30910 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30912 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30919 \begin_layout Standard
30920 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30921 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30922 called nomenclature or glossary.
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30926 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30933 \begin_inset Index idx
30936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30944 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30946 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30953 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30957 \begin_layout Standard
30958 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30959 and then use the menu
30961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30967 \begin_inset space ~
30972 or the toolbar button
30975 arg "nomencl-insert"
30980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30991 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30994 \begin_layout Standard
30995 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30996 The first is the term or
31000 that you wish to define.
31005 of the term or symbol.
31008 \begin_layout Standard
31009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31017 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31018 code for nomenclature entries the option
31022 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31030 \begin_layout Subsection
31031 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31032 \begin_inset Index idx
31035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31036 Nomenclature ! Layout
31044 \begin_layout Standard
31045 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31049 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31056 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31064 \begin_inset Newline newline
31072 \begin_inset Newline newline
31078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31085 character starts/ends the formula.
31086 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31087 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31099 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31109 \begin_layout Standard
31110 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31111 syntax is given in section
31112 \begin_inset space ~
31116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31118 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31125 \begin_layout Standard
31129 \begin_inset space ~
31134 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31136 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31141 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31148 in this document is:
31149 \begin_inset Newline newline
31154 dummy entry for the character
31159 \begin_inset Newline newline
31171 \begin_inset space ~
31181 font use the command
31210 \begin_layout Standard
31211 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31216 \begin_inset space \space{}
31220 \begin_inset Newline newline
31236 \begin_inset Newline newline
31239 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31240 This command will make the font of all symbols
31247 \begin_inset space ~
31255 \begin_layout Standard
31256 If the characters |
31257 \begin_inset space \space{}
31261 \begin_inset space \space{}
31265 \begin_inset space \space{}
31269 \begin_inset space \space{}
31273 \begin_inset space \space{}
31276 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31277 code they need to be escaped
31278 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31279 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31280 LatexCommand nomenclature
31281 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31282 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31290 \begin_layout Subsection
31291 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31292 \begin_inset Index idx
31295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31296 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31304 \begin_layout Standard
31305 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31306 -code of the symbol
31308 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31310 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31313 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31314 LatexCommand nomenclature
31316 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31324 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31328 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31329 LatexCommand nomenclature
31332 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31338 They will be sorted by
31339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31365 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31368 will be sorted before the
31372 since the character
31373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31380 is considered in sorting.
31383 \begin_layout Standard
31384 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31387 \begin_inset space ~
31392 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31393 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31395 For the example given, you can insert
31399 in this field for the
31400 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31407 will be located before
31408 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31414 \begin_layout Standard
31415 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31420 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31430 \begin_layout Subsection
31431 Nomenclature Options
31432 \begin_inset Index idx
31435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31436 Nomenclature ! Options
31442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31444 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31451 \begin_layout Standard
31456 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31457 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31460 \begin_layout Description
31461 refeq Appends the phrase
31462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31477 to every nomenclature entry, where
31483 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31486 \begin_layout Description
31487 refpage Appends the phrase
31488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31503 to every nomenclature entry, where
31509 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31512 \begin_layout Description
31513 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31516 \begin_layout Standard
31517 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31518 class options list in the
31520 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31524 In this document the options
31531 \begin_layout Standard
31532 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31540 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31545 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31548 \begin_layout Description
31558 \begin_layout Description
31561 nomrefpage Like the
31568 \begin_layout Description
31571 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31580 \begin_layout Description
31584 \begin_inset space ~
31590 \begin_inset space ~
31595 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31598 \begin_layout Standard
31600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31607 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31608 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31612 \begin_layout Standard
31621 \begin_inset Newline newline
31627 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31631 \begin_inset space ~
31643 unskip, see equation
31646 \begin_inset Newline newline
31653 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31654 \begin_inset Newline newline
31660 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31664 \begin_inset space ~
31681 \begin_layout Standard
31682 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31685 \begin_inset space ~
31690 in the document settings under
31693 \begin_inset space ~
31701 \begin_layout Standard
31709 \begin_inset Newline newline
31713 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31717 \begin_inset space ~
31729 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31731 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31732 \begin_inset Newline newline
31739 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31740 \begin_inset Newline newline
31744 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31748 \begin_inset space ~
31760 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31765 \begin_layout Subsection
31766 Printing the Nomenclature
31767 \begin_inset Index idx
31770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31771 Nomenclature ! Printing
31779 \begin_layout Standard
31780 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31783 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31799 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31800 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31801 You can choose between these settings:
31804 \begin_layout Description
31805 Default a space of 1
31806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31812 \begin_layout Description
31814 \begin_inset space ~
31818 \begin_inset space ~
31821 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31824 \begin_layout Description
31825 Custom custom space
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31829 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31838 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31846 For example, in order to change the name to
31850 , add the following line to the preamble:
31853 \begin_layout Standard
31861 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31864 \begin_layout Subsection
31865 Nomenclature Program
31866 \begin_inset Index idx
31869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31870 Nomenclature ! Program
31876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31878 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31885 \begin_layout Standard
31891 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31892 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31894 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31899 by adding options, see section
31900 \begin_inset space ~
31904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31906 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31911 The available options are listed and explained in
31912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31914 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31922 \begin_layout Section
31924 \begin_inset Index idx
31927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31934 \begin_inset Index idx
31937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31938 Document ! Branches
31944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31946 name "sec:Branches"
31953 \begin_layout Standard
31954 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31955 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31956 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31957 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31960 \begin_layout Standard
31961 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31962 allows you to put text into branches.
31963 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31964 To create a branch, either select the menu
31966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31967 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31970 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31979 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31980 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31981 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31982 and whether the name of the branch should
31983 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31984 (see below for an example).
31985 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31986 to the name of the other) and to add
31987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31999 \begin_inset space ~
32002 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32003 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32006 \begin_layout Standard
32007 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32008 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32013 where you can choose a branch.
32014 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32018 \begin_layout Standard
32019 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32020 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32023 \begin_layout Standard
32024 \begin_inset Branch Question
32028 \begin_layout Standard
32033 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32041 \begin_layout Standard
32042 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32046 \begin_layout Standard
32051 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32059 \begin_layout Standard
32066 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32067 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32070 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32071 Consider for example a file
32072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32079 which has the above branches.
32081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32088 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32112 branch were inactive,
32113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32128 branch was active, likewise
32129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32144 branch was active, and
32145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32148 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32152 if both branches were active.
32153 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32154 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32160 \begin_layout Standard
32161 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32167 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32168 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32172 \begin_inset space ~
32180 \begin_layout Standard
32181 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32185 \begin_layout Standard
32191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32198 branch is deactivated.
32204 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32210 \begin_layout Standard
32211 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32212 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32213 definitions for each branch.
32214 For example you can define for the question branch
32218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32220 -syntax, see section
32221 \begin_inset space ~
32225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32227 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32239 \begin_layout Standard
32249 \begin_layout Standard
32259 \begin_layout Standard
32260 and for the answer branch
32263 \begin_layout Standard
32273 \begin_layout Standard
32283 \begin_layout Standard
32284 \begin_inset Branch Question
32288 \begin_layout Standard
32292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32320 \begin_layout Standard
32321 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32325 \begin_layout Standard
32329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32357 \begin_layout Standard
32358 Now it is possible to use the
32362 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32369 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32372 commands to obtain conditional output.
32373 Here is an example formula where only the
32380 \begin_inset Formula
32382 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32390 \begin_layout Standard
32391 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32400 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32406 \begin_inset space \space{}
32409 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32411 For this advanced usage, see the
32417 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32422 \begin_layout Section
32424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32426 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32431 \begin_inset Index idx
32434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32443 \begin_layout Standard
32446 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32447 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32450 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32452 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32458 \begin_inset Index idx
32461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32463 packages ! hyperref
32468 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32469 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32470 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32471 part of the document.
32475 \begin_layout Standard
32476 The header information in the dialog tab
32480 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32481 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32482 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32483 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32487 \begin_inset space ~
32491 \begin_inset space ~
32496 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32497 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32498 and author entries.
32502 \begin_inset space ~
32506 \begin_inset space ~
32510 \begin_inset space ~
32515 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32518 \begin_layout Standard
32519 You can specify in the dialog tab
32523 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32528 \begin_inset space ~
32532 \begin_inset space ~
32536 \begin_inset space ~
32541 option allows long links to be split;
32544 \begin_inset space ~
32548 \begin_inset space ~
32552 \begin_inset space ~
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32565 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32568 \begin_inset space ~
32573 colors the different links.
32574 The default colors are:
32577 \begin_layout Labeling
32578 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32583 for hyperlinks and URLs
32586 \begin_layout Labeling
32587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32595 \begin_layout Labeling
32596 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32604 \begin_layout Standard
32605 but you can change these in the field
32610 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32616 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32619 \begin_layout Standard
32624 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32625 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32626 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32629 \begin_layout Standard
32634 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32635 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32636 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32646 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32647 when opening the PDF.
32649 \begin_inset space ~
32652 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32653 \begin_inset space ~
32656 1 will only display the sections.
32659 \begin_layout Standard
32660 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32661 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32667 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32678 \begin_layout Section
32680 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32684 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32691 \begin_layout Subsection
32694 \begin_inset Index idx
32697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32707 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32714 \begin_layout Standard
32715 As \SpecialChar LyX
32716 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32717 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32718 commands and constructs,
32721 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32722 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32723 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32724 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32725 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32726 cannot support all packages and
32730 \begin_layout Standard
32731 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32732 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32733 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32737 Code box is created by the menu
32739 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32741 \begin_inset space ~
32746 or by the toolbar button
32759 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32770 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32772 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32777 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32782 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32789 , you can write the command part
32795 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32796 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32800 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32801 Code box behind the word.
32802 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32803 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32807 \begin_layout Standard
32808 \begin_inset Graphics
32809 filename clipart/ERT.png
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32821 \begin_layout Standard
32822 This is a line with a
32826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32849 \begin_layout Standard
32850 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32858 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32859 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32860 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32861 know that the command is finished.
32869 \begin_layout Subsection
32870 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32872 \begin_inset Argument 1
32875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32876 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32883 \begin_inset Index idx
32886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32896 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32903 \begin_layout Standard
32904 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32905 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32906 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32907 uses in the background.
32908 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32909 is based on commands, you can
32910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32918 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32919 any time if you know the right commands.
32920 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32921 is the end of the day.
32922 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32923 all caption labels bold.
32924 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32926 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32930 \begin_layout Standard
32931 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32933 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32935 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32938 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32948 \begin_layout Standard
32949 As result you find that the package
32954 \begin_inset Index idx
32957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32965 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32970 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32974 \begin_inset space ~
32982 \begin_layout Standard
32987 usepackage[options]{package name}
32990 \begin_layout Standard
32991 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32992 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32993 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32994 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32997 \begin_layout Standard
32998 In your case the package name is
33003 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33008 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33009 So you add the command
33012 \begin_layout Standard
33017 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33020 \begin_layout Standard
33021 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33026 For more commands provided by the
33030 package, have a look at its documentation,
33031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33046 \begin_layout Standard
33047 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33049 For example if you use a
33053 class, you don't need the package
33057 , you can instead write
33060 \begin_layout Standard
33065 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33070 \begin_layout Standard
33071 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33072 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33073 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33080 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33083 \begin_layout Standard
33084 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33085 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33087 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33088 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33089 Code box as described in the previous
33093 \begin_layout Standard
33094 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33095 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33098 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33100 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33108 \begin_layout Standard
33109 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33115 \begin_layout Standard
33119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 \begin_inset Note Note
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33141 \begin_layout Left Header
33142 \begin_inset Argument 1
33145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33165 \begin_inset Note Note
33168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33169 defines the header line as described below
33177 \begin_layout Center Header
33178 \begin_inset Argument 1
33181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33190 \begin_layout Right Header
33191 \begin_inset Argument 1
33194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33215 \begin_layout Left Footer
33216 \begin_inset Argument 1
33219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33240 \begin_layout Center Footer
33241 \begin_inset Argument 1
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33256 \begin_inset Newline newline
33260 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33266 \begin_layout Right Footer
33267 \begin_inset Argument 1
33270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33292 \begin_layout Section
33293 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33296 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33301 \begin_inset Index idx
33304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33305 Document ! Header/Footer line
33311 \begin_inset Index idx
33314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33323 \begin_layout Standard
33324 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33328 \begin_inset space ~
33339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33351 As a second step add in the menu
33353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33363 Custom Header/Footerlines
33366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33370 This module offers the following 6
33371 \begin_inset space ~
33377 \begin_layout Description
33379 \begin_inset space ~
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33387 \begin_inset space ~
33391 \begin_inset space ~
33395 \begin_inset space ~
33401 \begin_layout Description
33403 \begin_inset space ~
33407 \begin_inset space ~
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33415 \begin_inset space ~
33419 \begin_inset space ~
33425 \begin_layout Standard
33426 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33427 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33430 \begin_layout Standard
33431 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33432 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33434 \begin_inset space ~
33438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33440 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33444 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33447 \begin_layout Standard
33448 \begin_inset Float figure
33454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33457 \begin_inset Tabular
33458 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33459 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33460 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33461 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33462 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33464 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33482 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33511 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33522 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33526 The normal text on the page goes here.
33527 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33529 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33530 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33535 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33544 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33620 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33625 name "fig:Page-layout"
33629 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33642 \begin_layout Standard
33643 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33651 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33655 \begin_inset space ~
33660 is set to “Default”.
33661 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33670 \begin_layout Subsection
33674 \begin_layout Standard
33675 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33676 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33677 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33678 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33680 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33682 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33686 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33687 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33693 \begin_inset space ~
33701 \begin_layout Description
33704 thepage prints the current page number
33707 \begin_layout Description
33710 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33713 \begin_layout Description
33716 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33719 \begin_layout Description
33722 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33723 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33730 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33733 because it usually goes in a left header.
33736 \begin_layout Description
33739 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33740 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33742 It is normally used in the right header.
33745 \begin_layout Subsection
33746 Default header/footer
33749 \begin_layout Standard
33750 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33751 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33752 footer has the page number.
33753 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33754 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33755 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33758 \begin_inset space ~
33766 \begin_layout Subsection
33770 \begin_layout Standard
33771 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33772 Some pages are different.
33773 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33774 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33775 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33776 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33777 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33781 Header and footer decoration line
33784 \begin_layout Standard
33785 By default, you get a 0.4
33786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33789 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33790 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33802 in the following way:
33805 \begin_layout Standard
33812 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33815 \begin_layout Standard
33816 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33829 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33836 \begin_layout Standard
33837 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33839 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33840 \begin_inset space ~
33844 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33854 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33855 Several header/footer lines
33858 \begin_layout Standard
33859 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33860 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33861 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33863 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33879 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33881 \begin_inset space ~
33889 \begin_layout Standard
33896 headheight}{height}
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33904 is a size in standard units (e.
33905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33909 \begin_inset space \space{}
33917 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33918 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33919 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33920 logfile with the menu
33922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33924 \begin_inset space ~
33932 \begin_inset space ~
33937 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33942 \begin_inset Index idx
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33947 packages ! fancyhdr
33953 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33954 for your header/footer.
33957 \begin_layout Subsection
33961 \begin_layout Standard
33962 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33963 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33964 This example consists of the following definition:
33967 \begin_layout Description
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33978 , empty optional argument
33981 \begin_layout Description
33983 \begin_inset space ~
33986 Header empty, empty optional argument
33989 \begin_layout Description
33991 \begin_inset space ~
34000 in the optional argument
34003 \begin_layout Description
34005 \begin_inset space ~
34014 in the optional argument
34017 \begin_layout Description
34019 \begin_inset space ~
34032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34036 \begin_inset Newline newline
34040 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34047 in the optional argument
34050 \begin_layout Description
34052 \begin_inset space ~
34061 , empty optional argument
34064 \begin_layout Description
34067 headrulewidth set to 2
34068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34074 \begin_layout Standard
34075 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34076 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34082 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34092 \begin_layout Standard
34093 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34099 \begin_layout Standard
34103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34107 pagestyle{headings}
34113 \begin_inset Note Note
34116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34117 switches back to page style with the default headings
34125 \begin_layout Section
34126 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34129 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34134 \begin_inset Index idx
34137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34144 \begin_inset Index idx
34147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34156 \begin_layout Standard
34158 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34159 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34160 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34163 \begin_layout Subsection
34167 \begin_layout Standard
34168 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34174 \begin_inset Index idx
34177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34179 packages ! preview-latex
34184 (on some systems named simply
34189 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34198 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34200 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34208 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34209 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34210 -package are automatically
34211 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34215 \begin_layout Subsection
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34220 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34221 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34223 activate the option
34226 \begin_inset space ~
34233 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34239 \begin_inset space ~
34243 \begin_inset space ~
34246 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34253 \begin_inset space ~
34266 \begin_inset space ~
34271 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34274 \begin_layout Standard
34275 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34280 \begin_inset space ~
34288 \begin_inset space ~
34296 \begin_layout Standard
34297 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34298 and when you finish
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34311 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34312 generated by activating the option
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34321 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34329 \begin_layout Subsection
34330 Selected document parts
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34334 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34335 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34336 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34337 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34339 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34345 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34346 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34347 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34358 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34370 is explained in section
34372 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34377 \begin_inset space ~
34387 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34388 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34389 the final rotated boxes,
34390 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34391 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34393 Here is the result:
34396 \begin_layout Standard
34397 \begin_inset Preview
34399 \begin_layout Standard
34404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34408 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34414 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34424 height_special "totalheight"
34429 backgroundcolor "none"
34432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34457 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34463 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34485 \begin_layout Standard
34486 Previewing works also for colors.
34487 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34506 is explained in section
34513 \begin_inset space ~
34526 \begin_layout Standard
34527 \begin_inset Preview
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34552 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34557 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 \begin_layout Standard
34577 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34583 \begin_layout Standard
34584 If \SpecialChar LyX
34585 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34586 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34587 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34588 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34589 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34590 the \SpecialChar TeX
34592 If \SpecialChar LyX
34593 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34594 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34596 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34597 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34598 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34601 \begin_layout Subsection
34606 \begin_layout Standard
34607 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34608 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34611 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34613 \begin_inset space ~
34618 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34620 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34622 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34623 's main window, then only this selection
34624 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34625 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34626 the source view window.
34631 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34632 ; but note that if you have
34633 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34635 not just the one which is open at the time.
34638 \begin_layout Section
34639 Advanced Find and Replace
34640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34642 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34647 \begin_inset Index idx
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34657 \begin_inset Index idx
34660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34669 \begin_layout Subsection
34673 \begin_layout Standard
34674 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34675 allows for searching of complex,
34676 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34678 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34679 The key-features are:
34682 \begin_layout Itemize
34683 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34684 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34685 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34689 \begin_layout Itemize
34690 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34691 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34692 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34693 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34696 \begin_layout Itemize
34697 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34698 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34699 outside of mathematics environments
34702 \begin_layout Itemize
34703 Search may be widened to a specific
34708 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34712 \begin_inset space ~
34715 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34716 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34723 \begin_layout Itemize
34724 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34725 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34730 \begin_inset space ~
34733 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34736 \begin_layout Subsection
34740 \begin_layout Standard
34741 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34743 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34756 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34759 ) or the toolbar button
34762 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34768 Advanced Find and Replace
34773 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34777 \begin_layout Standard
34783 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34787 \begin_inset space ~
34792 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34795 arg "paragraph-break"
34799 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34800 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34804 arg "paragraph-break"
34807 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34811 searches backwards.
34814 \begin_layout Standard
34818 \begin_inset space ~
34823 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34832 \begin_inset space ~
34837 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34841 Searching for mathematics
34844 \begin_layout Standard
34845 Mathematical formulas, such as
34846 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34849 or something more complex like
34850 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34853 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34858 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34859 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34860 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34861 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34871 \begin_layout Standard
34872 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34873 This is done by switching to the
34877 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34882 This way, entering in the
34889 \begin_layout Itemize
34890 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34891 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34894 \begin_layout Itemize
34895 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34896 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34899 \begin_layout Itemize
34900 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34901 of it only within section headings.
34902 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34903 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34907 \begin_layout Itemize
34908 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34909 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34916 \begin_layout Standard
34917 The entries made in the
34921 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34924 \begin_inset space ~
34930 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34934 button or alternatively press
34937 arg "paragraph-break"
34944 while the cursor is in the
34947 \begin_inset space ~
34955 \begin_layout Standard
34956 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34958 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34962 \begin_layout Itemize
34963 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34964 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34972 with its typewriter version
34973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34987 \begin_layout Itemize
34988 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34994 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35006 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35013 (you may want to enable the
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35024 \begin_inset space ~
35029 options and disable the
35037 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35045 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35046 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35050 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35053 , or occurrences of
35054 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35058 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35064 \begin_layout Subsection
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35069 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35074 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35078 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35088 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35094 This is done with the context menu
35096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35097 Insert Regular Expression
35099 while the cursor is in the
35104 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35105 expression matching rules
35109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35110 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35117 \begin_inset space ~
35120 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35121 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35127 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35128 same text in the document.
35129 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35130 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35133 \begin_layout Enumerate
35134 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35139 editor the fraction
35140 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35144 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35147 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35148 fractions with the given denominator.
35151 \begin_layout Enumerate
35152 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35164 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35169 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35170 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35171 Also, by inserting a
35172 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35175 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35176 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35179 \begin_layout Standard
35180 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35181 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35182 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35185 , and referring back to them through
35186 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35190 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35194 For example, try searching with the regexp
35195 \begin_inset Newline newline
35198 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35201 \begin_inset Newline newline
35204 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35207 \begin_layout Standard
35208 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35211 \begin_layout Standard
35212 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35220 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35221 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35222 sub-expressions is absolute.
35224 \begin_inset space ~
35228 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35231 always refers to the first occurrence of
35232 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35235 in all entered regexps.
35243 \begin_layout Section
35245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35247 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35252 \begin_inset Index idx
35255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35264 \begin_layout Standard
35266 has a built-in spell checker.
35269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35276 key or the toolbar button
35279 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35282 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35283 beginning of the currently selected text.
35284 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35285 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35286 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35287 scrolled so that it is visible.
35288 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35289 n, if any could be found.
35290 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35294 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35295 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35298 \begin_layout Standard
35299 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35306 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35307 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35309 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35310 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35321 arg "dialog-show character"
35324 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35326 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35329 \begin_layout Standard
35330 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35331 can be downloaded from here:
35332 \begin_inset Newline newline
35336 \begin_inset Flex URL
35339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35341 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35347 \begin_inset Newline newline
35351 \begin_inset space ~
35354 files for each language.
35355 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35359 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35360 's installation subfolder
35368 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35370 \begin_inset Newline newline
35373 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35374 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35375 but in most cases these are
35391 is the language code.
35394 \begin_layout Subsection
35398 \begin_layout Standard
35401 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35402 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35407 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35410 you can set the following things:
35413 \begin_layout Description
35415 \begin_inset space ~
35418 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35419 should use for spell checking.
35420 Depending on your platform,
35434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35435 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35436 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35451 \begin_inset space ~
35454 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35457 \begin_layout Description
35459 \begin_inset space ~
35462 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35463 will always use the given language
35464 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35467 \begin_layout Description
35469 \begin_inset space ~
35472 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35478 \begin_inset space \space{}
35482 This should normally not be needed.
35485 \begin_layout Description
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset space ~
35494 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35506 \begin_layout Description
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35511 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35512 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35513 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35514 appear in a context menu.
35515 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35519 \begin_layout Description
35521 \begin_inset space ~
35525 \begin_inset space ~
35529 \begin_inset space ~
35532 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35536 \begin_layout Section
35538 \begin_inset Index idx
35541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35550 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35557 \begin_layout Standard
35559 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35560 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35572 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35582 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35584 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35585 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35586 which are available for many languages.
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35591 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35595 \begin_layout Subsection
35596 Setting up the thesaurus
35599 \begin_layout Standard
35608 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35612 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35617 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35623 \begin_inset space ~
35631 For instance, the US English files are named:
35634 \begin_layout Itemize
35638 \begin_layout Itemize
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35651 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35652 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35655 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35656 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35657 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35659 \begin_inset space ~
35664 ) to the path where they are installed.
35668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35669 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35670 ies, typical locations are
35676 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35680 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35684 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35687 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35693 LibreOffice-<Version>
35700 On the Mac, the default location is
35702 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35703 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35704 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35705 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35706 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35707 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35715 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35716 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35717 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35721 \begin_layout Standard
35722 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35723 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35727 \begin_layout Itemize
35728 \begin_inset Flex URL
35731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35733 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35741 \begin_layout Standard
35742 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35743 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35745 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35746 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35747 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35754 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35756 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35757 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35761 \begin_layout Standard
35762 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35764 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35767 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35773 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35776 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35777 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35785 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35786 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35787 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35794 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35797 \begin_layout Subsection
35798 Using the thesaurus
35801 \begin_layout Standard
35802 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35804 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35807 or the toolbar button
35810 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35813 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35815 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35817 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35818 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35819 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35828 ), related terms (such as
35831 \begin_inset space ~
35840 ), compounds (such as
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35852 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35861 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35864 \begin_layout Standard
35865 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35866 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35870 \begin_layout Standard
35871 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35872 the dictionary, such as the above
35876 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35881 \begin_inset space \space{}
35884 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35885 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35886 For example, looking up the word form
35890 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35895 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35900 \begin_inset space \space{}
35911 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35912 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35913 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35916 \begin_layout Section
35918 \begin_inset Index idx
35921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35928 \begin_inset Index idx
35931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35932 Document ! Change Tracking
35938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35940 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35947 \begin_layout Standard
35948 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35949 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35950 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35951 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35955 \begin_inset space ~
35958 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35960 \begin_inset space ~
35968 \begin_layout Standard
35969 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35983 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35984 You can change the color in
35986 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35987 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35998 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36004 \begin_inset Index idx
36007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36008 Color ! Change tracking
36013 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36014 's status bar when the
36015 cursor is in changed text.
36016 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36019 arg "changes-merge"
36025 \begin_layout Standard
36026 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36028 \begin_inset Index idx
36031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36041 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36047 \begin_layout Standard
36048 \begin_inset Graphics
36049 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36057 \begin_layout Standard
36058 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36065 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36068 \begin_layout Standard
36069 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36075 \begin_layout Standard
36076 \begin_inset Tabular
36077 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36078 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36080 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36090 arg "changes-track"
36098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36109 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36129 arg "changes-output"
36137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36148 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36154 \begin_inset space ~
36158 \begin_inset space ~
36167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36188 Jumps to the next change
36194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36203 arg "change-accept"
36211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36219 \begin_inset space ~
36222 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36242 arg "change-reject"
36250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36256 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36258 \begin_inset space ~
36261 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36263 \begin_inset space ~
36272 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36281 arg "changes-merge"
36289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36297 \begin_inset space ~
36300 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36320 arg "all-changes-accept"
36328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36336 \begin_inset space ~
36339 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36363 arg "all-changes-reject"
36371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36379 \begin_inset space ~
36382 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36384 \begin_inset space ~
36388 \begin_inset space ~
36397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36421 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36423 \begin_inset space ~
36432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36455 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36473 \begin_layout Standard
36474 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36480 \begin_layout Standard
36481 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36501 \begin_layout Standard
36502 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36503 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36504 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36505 the next change after the current cursor position.
36506 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36507 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36508 step to the next change.
36509 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36512 \begin_layout Standard
36513 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36514 to describe a change.
36517 \begin_layout Standard
36518 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36524 \begin_inset Index idx
36527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36535 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36544 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36548 \begin_layout Section
36549 Comparison of Documents
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36552 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36557 \begin_inset Index idx
36560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36561 Comparison of documents
36569 \begin_layout Standard
36570 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36577 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36578 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36580 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36582 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36586 \begin_inset space ~
36590 \begin_inset space ~
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36611 \begin_inset space ~
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36619 \begin_inset space ~
36623 \begin_inset space ~
36628 enables the change tracking option
36631 \begin_inset space ~
36635 \begin_inset space ~
36639 \begin_inset space ~
36644 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36647 \begin_layout Section
36648 International Support
36649 \begin_inset Index idx
36652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36653 International support
36661 \begin_layout Standard
36662 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36663 with any language you want.
36664 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36665 up \SpecialChar LyX
36667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36669 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36677 \begin_layout Standard
36678 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36679 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36680 \begin_inset space ~
36684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36686 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36693 \begin_layout Subsection
36695 \begin_inset Index idx
36698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36705 \begin_inset Index idx
36708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36709 Document ! Settings
36715 \begin_inset Index idx
36718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36719 Document ! Language
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36734 dialog lets you set
36736 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36746 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36756 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36757 For details about the different encoding options see section
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36764 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36771 \begin_layout Subsection
36772 Keyboard mapping configuration
36773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36775 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36782 \begin_layout Standard
36783 If you have for example a U.
36784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36787 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36788 can use an alternate keymap.
36789 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36794 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36795 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36796 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36799 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36811 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36812 which one you want to use.
36815 \begin_layout Standard
36816 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36817 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36818 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36822 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36823 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36824 one to support the characters you want.
36825 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36832 \begin_layout Chapter
36835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36837 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36844 \begin_layout Standard
36845 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36846 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36847 topic inside the user's guide.
36850 \begin_layout Section
36852 \begin_inset Index idx
36855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36864 \begin_layout Standard
36869 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36872 \begin_layout Subsection
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 Creates a new document.
36880 \begin_layout Subsection
36884 \begin_layout Standard
36885 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36886 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36887 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36890 \begin_layout Subsection
36894 \begin_layout Standard
36898 \begin_layout Subsection
36902 \begin_layout Standard
36903 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36904 Click there on a file to open it.
36907 \begin_layout Subsection
36911 \begin_layout Standard
36912 Closes the current document.
36915 \begin_layout Subsection
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 Closes all opened documents.
36923 \begin_layout Subsection
36927 \begin_layout Standard
36928 Saves the actual document.
36931 \begin_layout Subsection
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36939 \begin_layout Subsection
36943 \begin_layout Standard
36944 Saves all opened documents.
36947 \begin_layout Subsection
36951 \begin_layout Standard
36952 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36955 \begin_layout Subsection
36959 \begin_layout Standard
36960 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36961 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36962 It is described in the section
36964 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36969 Additional Features
36974 \begin_layout Subsection
36978 \begin_layout Standard
36979 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36980 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36982 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36983 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36987 \begin_layout Standard
36988 When using the menu entry
36991 \begin_inset space ~
36996 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37000 \begin_inset space ~
37004 \begin_inset space ~
37008 \begin_inset space ~
37013 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37014 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37017 \begin_layout Subsection
37019 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37021 name "subsec:Export"
37028 \begin_layout Standard
37029 You can export your document to various file formats.
37030 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37032 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37033 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37034 during its configuration.
37037 \begin_layout Standard
37038 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37040 \begin_inset space ~
37044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37046 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37053 \begin_layout Description
37059 \begin_inset space ~
37062 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37067 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37068 \begin_inset Newline newline
37071 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37072 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37076 \begin_layout Description
37077 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37083 \begin_layout Description
37085 \begin_inset space ~
37088 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37094 \begin_layout Description
37095 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37096 's native DVI-format.
37097 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37098 files paths or file names in your document.
37100 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37107 \begin_layout Description
37108 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37109 in files paths or file names
37112 \begin_layout Description
37114 \begin_inset space ~
37121 ) DVI-format using the program
37123 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37126 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37130 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37138 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37146 \begin_layout Description
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37151 (cropped) the same as
37155 but with cropped page margins.
37158 \begin_layout Description
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37163 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37167 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37172 \begin_layout Description
37176 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37184 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37192 \begin_layout Description
37194 \begin_inset space ~
37198 \begin_inset space ~
37201 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37205 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37213 \begin_layout Description
37217 \begin_inset space ~
37226 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37227 source that is compilable with the program
37229 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37233 \begin_layout Description
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37242 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37243 source, additionally all images used in the document
37244 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37248 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37251 \begin_layout Description
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37260 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37261 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37262 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37270 \begin_layout Description
37274 \begin_inset space ~
37283 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37284 source that is compilable with the program
37290 \begin_layout Description
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37303 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37304 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37310 \begin_layout Description
37312 \begin_inset space ~
37315 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37316 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37322 \begin_inset space \space{}
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37346 represent the version number)
37349 \begin_layout Description
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37358 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37359 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37360 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37364 \begin_layout Description
37365 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37366 's internal XHTML engine
37369 \begin_layout Description
37371 \begin_inset space ~
37375 \begin_inset space ~
37379 \begin_inset space ~
37383 \begin_inset space ~
37386 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37391 For the conversion the program
37400 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37403 \begin_layout Description
37404 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37409 \begin_layout Description
37411 \begin_inset space ~
37414 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37416 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37419 For the conversion the program
37428 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37431 \begin_layout Description
37433 \begin_inset space ~
37436 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37437 For the conversion the program
37446 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37449 \begin_layout Description
37451 \begin_inset space ~
37454 (cropped) the same as
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37462 but with cropped page margins
37465 \begin_layout Description
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37474 PDF-format using the program
37478 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37481 \begin_layout Description
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset space ~
37502 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37507 \begin_inset space \space{}
37510 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37514 \begin_layout Description
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37523 PDF-format using the program
37525 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37528 , produces PDF-files directly
37531 \begin_layout Description
37535 \begin_inset space ~
37540 PDF-format using the program
37544 , produces PDF-files directly
37547 \begin_layout Description
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37556 PDF-format using the program
37560 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37563 \begin_layout Description
37567 \begin_inset space ~
37572 PDF-format using the program
37577 , produces PDF-files directly
37580 \begin_layout Description
37584 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_layout Description
37596 \begin_inset space ~
37600 \begin_inset space ~
37605 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37606 and then exported as text using the program
37611 \begin_layout Description
37616 PostScript format using the program
37624 options see section
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37631 reference "subsec:General-output"
37638 \begin_layout Description
37639 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37640 source and also code in the statistical programming
37654 it is possible to use
37658 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37662 \begin_layout Standard
37663 If one of the menu entries
37670 \begin_inset space ~
37679 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37681 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37694 \begin_inset Index idx
37697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37698 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37707 \begin_layout Subsection
37711 \begin_layout Standard
37712 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37713 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37722 reference "sec:Paths"
37727 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37736 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37737 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37738 's preferences as described in section
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37745 reference "subsec:Converters"
37752 \begin_layout Subsection
37753 New and Close Window
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37761 \begin_layout Subsection
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37766 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37769 \begin_layout Section
37771 \begin_inset Index idx
37774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37783 \begin_layout Subsection
37787 \begin_layout Standard
37788 Described in section
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37795 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37802 \begin_layout Subsection
37803 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37806 \begin_layout Standard
37807 Described in section
37808 \begin_inset space ~
37812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37814 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37821 \begin_layout Subsection
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37826 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37827 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37830 \begin_layout Subsection
37834 \begin_layout Standard
37835 Selects the whole document.
37838 \begin_layout Subsection
37839 Find & Replace (Quick)
37842 \begin_layout Standard
37843 Described in section
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37850 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37857 \begin_layout Subsection
37858 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37861 \begin_layout Standard
37862 Described in section
37863 \begin_inset space ~
37867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37869 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37876 \begin_layout Subsection
37877 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37880 \begin_layout Standard
37881 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37885 \begin_layout Subsection
37889 \begin_layout Standard
37890 Described in section
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37897 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37904 \begin_layout Subsection
37906 \begin_inset Index idx
37909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37910 Paragraph ! Settings
37918 \begin_layout Standard
37919 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37920 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37924 \begin_layout Standard
37925 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37926 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37933 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37935 \begin_inset space ~
37943 \begin_layout Subsection
37944 Table and Rows & Columns
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37948 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37949 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37950 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37953 \begin_layout Subsection
37957 \begin_layout Standard
37958 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37959 It will dissolve this inset.
37960 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37964 \begin_layout Subsection
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37970 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37973 \begin_layout Subsection
37974 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37977 \begin_layout Standard
37978 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37980 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37981 \begin_inset space ~
37985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37987 reference "sec:Nesting"
37992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37994 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38001 \begin_layout Subsection
38004 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38007 \begin_layout Standard
38008 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38009 nts of the same type.
38011 \begin_inset space ~
38015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38017 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38021 for an explanation.
38024 \begin_layout Section
38026 \begin_inset Index idx
38029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38038 \begin_layout Standard
38039 At the bottom of the
38043 menu the opened documents are listed.
38046 \begin_layout Subsection
38047 Open/Close all Insets
38050 \begin_layout Standard
38051 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38054 \begin_layout Subsection
38055 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38058 \begin_layout Standard
38059 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38063 Math macros are described in the
38070 \begin_layout Subsection
38074 \begin_layout Standard
38075 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38076 \begin_inset space ~
38080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38082 reference "sec:Navigating"
38087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38089 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38096 \begin_layout Subsection
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38101 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38109 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38116 \begin_layout Subsection
38120 \begin_layout Standard
38121 Opens a window showing console messages.
38122 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38124 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38127 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38128 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38129 is processing the document.
38132 \begin_layout Subsection
38134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38136 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38141 \begin_inset Index idx
38144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38153 \begin_layout Standard
38154 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38156 All toolbars and the
38159 \begin_inset space ~
38164 can be turned on and off.
38169 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38181 \begin_inset space ~
38193 \begin_inset space ~
38198 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38202 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38214 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38218 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38219 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38220 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38221 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38222 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38225 \begin_layout Standard
38227 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38228 \begin_inset space ~
38232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38234 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38241 \begin_layout Subsection
38245 \begin_layout Standard
38249 \begin_inset space ~
38253 \begin_inset space ~
38257 \begin_inset space ~
38261 \begin_inset space ~
38265 \begin_inset space ~
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38274 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38275 's main window vertically while
38278 \begin_inset space ~
38282 \begin_inset space ~
38286 \begin_inset space ~
38290 \begin_inset space ~
38294 \begin_inset space ~
38298 \begin_inset space ~
38303 will split it horizontally.
38304 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38305 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38306 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38307 three or more documents at the same time.
38308 To close a split view, use the menu
38311 \begin_inset space ~
38315 \begin_inset space ~
38323 \begin_layout Subsection
38327 \begin_layout Standard
38328 Closes a split view.
38331 \begin_layout Subsection
38335 \begin_layout Standard
38336 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38337 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38338 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38339 's main window fullscreen.
38340 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38341 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38344 \begin_layout Section
38346 \begin_inset Index idx
38349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 \begin_layout Subsection
38362 \begin_layout Standard
38363 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38364 \begin_inset space ~
38368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38370 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38381 \begin_layout Subsection
38383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38385 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38392 \begin_layout Standard
38393 Here you can insert the following characters:
38396 \begin_layout Description
38401 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38404 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38405 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38406 -packages you have installed.
38407 You can get a complete display by checking
38410 \begin_inset space ~
38416 \begin_inset Newline newline
38420 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38428 Not all characters will be visible in the
38432 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38433 dialog (see section
38434 \begin_inset space ~
38438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38440 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38444 ) can display every character.
38452 \begin_layout Description
38453 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38457 \begin_layout Description
38459 \begin_inset space ~
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38466 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38467 \begin_inset space ~
38471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38473 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38480 \begin_layout Description
38482 \begin_inset space ~
38485 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38488 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38489 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38495 \begin_layout Description
38497 \begin_inset space ~
38500 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38510 \begin_layout Description
38512 \begin_inset space ~
38515 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38519 \begin_layout Description
38521 \begin_inset space ~
38524 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38528 \begin_layout Description
38530 \begin_inset space ~
38533 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38539 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38545 \begin_layout Description
38547 \begin_inset space ~
38550 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38554 \begin_layout Description
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38560 \begin_inset Index idx
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38570 \begin_inset Index idx
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38574 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38579 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38580 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38582 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38588 \begin_inset Index idx
38591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38599 \begin_inset Newline newline
38602 More information about this feature can be found in the
38608 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38614 \begin_layout Description
38615 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38617 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38618 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38622 \begin_layout Subsection
38626 \begin_layout Standard
38627 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38630 \begin_layout Description
38631 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38632 \begin_inset script superscript
38634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38643 \begin_layout Description
38644 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38645 \begin_inset script subscript
38647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38656 \begin_layout Description
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38661 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38668 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38675 \begin_layout Description
38677 \begin_inset space ~
38680 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38687 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38694 \begin_layout Description
38696 \begin_inset space ~
38699 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38700 \begin_inset space ~
38704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38706 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38713 \begin_layout Description
38715 \begin_inset space ~
38718 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38724 \begin_inset space \space{}
38727 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38728 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38737 To insert a fraction use the command
38742 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38746 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38755 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38762 \begin_layout Description
38764 \begin_inset space ~
38767 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38774 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38781 \begin_layout Description
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38786 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38793 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38800 \begin_layout Description
38802 \begin_inset space ~
38805 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38806 \begin_inset space ~
38810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38812 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38819 \begin_layout Description
38820 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38821 \begin_inset space ~
38825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38827 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38834 \begin_layout Description
38836 \begin_inset space ~
38839 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38840 \begin_inset space ~
38844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38846 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38853 \begin_layout Description
38855 \begin_inset space ~
38858 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38859 \begin_inset space ~
38863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38865 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38872 \begin_layout Description
38874 \begin_inset space ~
38878 \begin_inset space ~
38881 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38884 \begin_inset space ~
38888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38890 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38897 for a usage example.
38900 \begin_layout Description
38902 \begin_inset space ~
38906 \begin_inset space ~
38909 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38910 \begin_inset space ~
38914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38916 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38923 \begin_layout Description
38925 \begin_inset space ~
38928 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38929 as described in section
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38936 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38943 \begin_layout Description
38945 \begin_inset space ~
38948 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38949 \begin_inset space ~
38953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38955 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38962 \begin_layout Description
38964 \begin_inset space ~
38967 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38968 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38970 \begin_inset space ~
38974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38976 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38983 \begin_layout Description
38985 \begin_inset space ~
38988 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38989 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38995 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39002 \begin_layout Description
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39008 \begin_inset space ~
39011 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39012 \begin_inset space ~
39016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39018 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39025 \begin_layout Subsection
39029 \begin_layout Standard
39030 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39055 are described in section
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39062 reference "sec:toc"
39071 is described in section
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39078 reference "sec:Index"
39086 is described in section
39087 \begin_inset space ~
39091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39093 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39099 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39102 is described in section
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39109 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39116 \begin_layout Subsection
39120 \begin_layout Standard
39121 To insert floats, as described in section
39122 \begin_inset space ~
39126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39128 reference "sec:Floats"
39132 and in detail the chapter
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39147 \begin_layout Subsection
39151 \begin_layout Standard
39152 To insert notes, described in section
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39159 reference "sec:Notes"
39166 \begin_layout Subsection
39170 \begin_layout Standard
39171 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39173 Branches are described in section
39174 \begin_inset space ~
39178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39180 reference "sec:Branches"
39187 \begin_layout Subsection
39191 \begin_layout Standard
39192 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39193 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39195 An example is the document class
39196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39203 with three custom insets.
39206 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39210 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39216 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39219 \begin_layout Subsection
39221 \begin_inset Index idx
39224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 \begin_layout Standard
39234 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39236 For more information see chapter
39238 External Document Parts
39241 \begin_inset space ~
39247 \begin_layout Subsection
39249 \begin_inset Index idx
39252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 \begin_layout Standard
39262 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39263 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39270 \begin_inset space ~
39278 \begin_layout Subsection
39282 \begin_layout Standard
39287 dialog as described in section
39288 \begin_inset space ~
39292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39294 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39301 \begin_layout Subsection
39305 \begin_layout Standard
39310 as described in section
39311 \begin_inset space ~
39315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39317 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39324 \begin_layout Subsection
39328 \begin_layout Standard
39333 as described in section
39334 \begin_inset space ~
39338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39340 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39347 \begin_layout Subsection
39349 \begin_inset Index idx
39352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39359 \begin_inset Index idx
39362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39363 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39371 \begin_layout Standard
39372 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39373 Floats are described in section
39374 \begin_inset space ~
39378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39380 reference "sec:Floats"
39384 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39386 Multi-page Captions
39391 \begin_inset space ~
39399 \begin_layout Subsection
39403 \begin_layout Standard
39404 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39411 reference "sec:Index"
39418 \begin_layout Subsection
39422 \begin_layout Standard
39423 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39424 \begin_inset space ~
39428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39430 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39437 \begin_layout Subsection
39441 \begin_layout Standard
39442 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39443 Tables are described in section
39444 \begin_inset space ~
39448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39450 reference "sec:Tables"
39454 and in detail in the chapter
39461 \begin_inset space ~
39469 \begin_layout Subsection
39473 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Graphics are described in section
39480 \begin_inset space ~
39484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39486 reference "sec:Graphics"
39493 \begin_layout Subsection
39497 \begin_layout Standard
39498 Inserts a URL as described in section
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39505 reference "subsec:URLs"
39512 \begin_layout Subsection
39516 \begin_layout Standard
39517 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39518 \begin_inset space ~
39522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39524 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39531 \begin_layout Subsection
39535 \begin_layout Standard
39536 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39537 \begin_inset space ~
39541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39543 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39550 \begin_layout Subsection
39554 \begin_layout Standard
39555 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39556 \begin_inset space ~
39560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39562 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39569 \begin_layout Subsection
39573 \begin_layout Standard
39574 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39575 title or caption of a float.
39576 Inserts a short title as described in section
39577 \begin_inset space ~
39581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39583 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39590 \begin_layout Subsection
39595 \begin_layout Standard
39596 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39597 Code box as described in section
39598 \begin_inset space ~
39602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39604 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39611 \begin_layout Subsection
39613 \begin_inset Index idx
39616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39625 \begin_layout Standard
39626 Inserts a program listings box.
39627 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39629 Program Code Listings
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39642 \begin_layout Subsection
39646 \begin_layout Standard
39647 Inserts the actual date.
39648 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39653 \begin_layout Subsection
39657 \begin_layout Standard
39658 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39659 \begin_inset space ~
39663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39665 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39672 \begin_layout Section
39674 \begin_inset Index idx
39677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39686 \begin_layout Standard
39687 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39688 \begin_inset space ~
39691 of the current document.
39692 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39695 \begin_layout Subsection
39699 \begin_layout Standard
39700 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39701 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39702 to jump, for example, between section
39703 \begin_inset space ~
39707 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39711 2.5 and use the submenu
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39725 \begin_inset space ~
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39735 \begin_inset space ~
39741 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39745 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39751 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39754 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39757 \begin_layout Standard
39758 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39762 \begin_inset space ~
39767 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39770 \begin_inset space ~
39775 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39778 \begin_layout Subsection
39779 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39782 \begin_layout Standard
39783 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39787 \begin_layout Subsection
39791 \begin_layout Standard
39792 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39793 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39794 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39798 \begin_inset space ~
39802 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_layout Subsection
39814 \begin_layout Standard
39815 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39818 The \SpecialChar LyX
39819 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39821 \begin_inset space ~
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39834 manual for a detailed description.
39837 \begin_layout Section
39839 \begin_inset Index idx
39842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39851 \begin_layout Subsection
39855 \begin_layout Standard
39856 Change Tracking is described in section
39857 \begin_inset space ~
39861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39863 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39870 \begin_layout Subsection
39878 \begin_layout Standard
39879 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39880 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39881 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39883 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39884 to the clipboard or update the view.
39885 \begin_inset Newline newline
39888 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39892 \begin_layout Standard
39895 Open Containing Directory
39897 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39898 's temporary folder for the document.
39899 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39900 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39901 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39902 For example some journals require to send the
39906 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39910 \begin_layout Subsection
39911 Start Appendix Here
39914 \begin_layout Standard
39915 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39916 as described in section
39917 \begin_inset space ~
39921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39923 reference "sec:Appendices"
39930 \begin_layout Subsection
39932 \begin_inset space ~
39938 \begin_layout Standard
39939 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39940 default output format for the document (menu
39942 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39943 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39944 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39946 \begin_inset space ~
39950 \begin_inset space ~
39956 \begin_inset space ~
39960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39962 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39966 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39969 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39970 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39972 \begin_inset space ~
39975 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39980 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39986 \begin_inset space ~
39992 \begin_inset space ~
39996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39998 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40002 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40003 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40005 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40006 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40011 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40013 \begin_inset space ~
40016 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40020 \begin_inset space ~
40024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40026 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40031 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40032 when it is first configured.
40033 The default output format is
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40044 \begin_layout Subsection
40045 View (Other Formats)
40048 \begin_layout Standard
40049 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40050 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40051 actual document with an external program.
40052 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40053 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40054 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40056 All possible formats are listed in section
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40063 reference "subsec:Export"
40068 You should at least see the menu entry
40073 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40075 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40083 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40088 \begin_inset Index idx
40091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40092 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40101 \begin_layout Standard
40102 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40103 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40105 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40106 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40108 \begin_inset space ~
40111 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40113 \begin_inset space ~
40116 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40120 \begin_inset space ~
40124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40126 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40131 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40132 when it is first configured.
40135 \begin_layout Subsection
40137 \begin_inset space ~
40143 \begin_layout Standard
40144 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40145 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40148 \begin_layout Subsection
40149 Update (Other Formats)
40152 \begin_layout Standard
40153 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40154 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40157 \begin_layout Subsection
40158 View Master Document
40161 \begin_layout Standard
40162 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40178 \begin_inset space ~
40183 manual for more information on this topic).
40184 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40185 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40193 \begin_inset space ~
40198 generates the output of the whole book, while
40202 will just output the chapter alone.
40205 \begin_layout Standard
40206 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40207 in the document settings (menu
40209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40210 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40211 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40229 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40233 ) or in the preferences (menu
40235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40236 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40238 \begin_inset space ~
40241 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40246 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40248 \begin_inset space ~
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40258 \begin_inset space ~
40262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40264 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40271 \begin_layout Subsection
40272 Update Master Document
40275 \begin_layout Standard
40276 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40297 manual for more information on this topic).
40298 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40299 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40302 \begin_layout Standard
40303 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40304 in the document settings (menu
40306 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40307 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40308 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40314 \begin_inset space ~
40320 \begin_inset space ~
40324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40326 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40330 ) or in the preferences (menu
40332 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40333 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40335 \begin_inset space ~
40338 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40340 \begin_inset space ~
40343 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40361 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40368 \begin_layout Subsection
40370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40372 name "subsec:Compressed"
40379 \begin_layout Standard
40380 Un/compresses the current document.
40381 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40382 compression (see the
40384 Additional Features
40386 manual for details).
40389 \begin_layout Subsection
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40394 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40397 \begin_layout Subsection
40401 \begin_layout Standard
40402 The document settings are described in appendix
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40409 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40416 \begin_layout Section
40418 \begin_inset Index idx
40421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40430 \begin_layout Subsection
40434 \begin_layout Standard
40435 Spell checking is explained in section
40436 \begin_inset space ~
40440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40442 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40449 \begin_layout Subsection
40453 \begin_layout Standard
40454 The thesaurus is described in section
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40461 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40468 \begin_layout Subsection
40470 \begin_inset Index idx
40473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40480 \begin_inset Index idx
40483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40492 \begin_layout Standard
40493 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40494 the highlighted document part.
40497 \begin_layout Subsection
40503 \begin_inset Index idx
40506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40507 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40517 Generates with the help of the program
40519 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40522 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40523 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40524 This feature is not available on Windows.
40527 \begin_layout Subsection
40533 \begin_inset Index idx
40536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40546 \begin_layout Standard
40547 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40557 to see the full filename paths.
40560 \begin_layout Subsection
40562 \begin_inset Index idx
40565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40574 \begin_layout Standard
40575 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40576 files as described in section
40577 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40583 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40590 \begin_layout Subsection
40592 \begin_inset Index idx
40595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40608 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40626 \begin_inset Index idx
40629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40630 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40639 \begin_layout Standard
40640 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40641 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40642 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40643 -packages and programs it needs; see
40645 \begin_inset space ~
40649 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40651 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40658 \begin_layout Subsection
40662 \begin_layout Standard
40667 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40674 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40681 \begin_layout Section
40683 \begin_inset Index idx
40686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40697 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40699 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40703 \begin_layout Standard
40707 \begin_inset space ~
40712 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40713 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40714 packages and classes found
40715 by \SpecialChar LyX
40717 \begin_inset space ~
40721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40723 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40730 \begin_layout Standard
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40739 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40744 \begin_layout Section
40746 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40748 name "sec:Toolbars"
40755 \begin_layout Standard
40756 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40763 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40772 This is described in the
40774 Additional Features
40779 \begin_layout Subsection
40781 \begin_inset Index idx
40784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40793 \begin_layout Standard
40794 \begin_inset Graphics
40795 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40803 \begin_layout Standard
40804 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40810 \begin_layout Standard
40811 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40828 \begin_inset Note Note
40831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40832 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40837 manual for more information.
40845 \begin_layout Standard
40846 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40852 \begin_layout Standard
40853 \begin_inset Tabular
40854 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40855 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40863 \begin_inset Graphics
40864 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40878 pull-down box for the environments
40891 \begin_layout Standard
40892 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40898 \begin_layout Standard
40900 \begin_inset Tabular
40901 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40902 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40903 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40904 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40928 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40958 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40988 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41004 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41018 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41034 arg "spelling-continuously"
41042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41046 Spellcheck continuously
41052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41075 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41105 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41135 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41165 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41172 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41195 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41211 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41227 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41251 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41265 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41293 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41307 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41308 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41336 Emphasize text, function of the
41338 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41343 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41373 Set text to noun style, function of the
41375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41377 \begin_inset space ~
41380 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41398 arg "textstyle-apply"
41406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41410 Format text using the current settings in the
41412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41414 \begin_inset space ~
41417 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41426 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41450 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41452 \begin_inset space ~
41461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41470 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41498 arg "tabular-insert"
41506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41512 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41528 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41540 Toggle outline window on/off,
41542 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41558 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41570 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41585 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41597 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41610 \begin_layout Subsection
41612 \begin_inset Index idx
41615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41624 \begin_layout Standard
41625 \begin_inset Graphics
41626 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41634 \begin_layout Standard
41635 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41641 \begin_layout Standard
41642 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41646 \begin_layout Standard
41647 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41653 \begin_layout Standard
41654 \begin_inset Tabular
41655 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41656 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41657 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41658 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41659 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41686 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41695 arg "layout Enumerate"
41703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41722 arg "layout Itemize"
41730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41776 arg "layout Description"
41784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41794 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 arg "depth-increment"
41811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41817 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41819 \begin_inset space ~
41823 \begin_inset space ~
41832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41841 arg "depth-decrement"
41849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41857 \begin_inset space ~
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41879 arg "float-insert figure"
41887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41894 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41910 arg "float-insert table"
41918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41925 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41962 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41971 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41985 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41992 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42001 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42022 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42045 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42047 \begin_inset space ~
42056 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42065 arg "nomencl-insert"
42073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42079 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42081 \begin_inset space ~
42090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42099 arg "footnote-insert"
42107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42113 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42129 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42178 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42180 \begin_inset space ~
42189 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42198 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42219 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42242 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42249 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42274 \begin_inset space ~
42283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42292 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42307 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42323 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42338 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42340 \begin_inset space ~
42349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42358 arg "dialog-show character"
42366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42372 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42374 \begin_inset space ~
42377 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42393 arg "layout-paragraph"
42401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42407 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42409 \begin_inset space ~
42418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42427 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42441 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42455 \begin_layout Subsection
42456 View/Update Toolbar
42457 \begin_inset Index idx
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42461 Toolbar ! View / Update
42469 \begin_layout Standard
42470 \begin_inset Graphics
42471 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42479 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42485 \begin_layout Standard
42486 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42490 \begin_layout Standard
42491 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42497 \begin_layout Standard
42498 \begin_inset Tabular
42499 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42500 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42501 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42502 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42542 arg "buffer-update"
42550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 arg "master-buffer-view"
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 arg "master-buffer-update"
42614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42622 \begin_inset space ~
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42644 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42658 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42659 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42660 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42661 Synchronize with Output
42667 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42691 View (Other Formats)
42697 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42704 arg "update-others"
42712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42719 Update (Other Formats)
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42737 \begin_layout Subsection
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42742 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42743 \begin_inset space ~
42747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42749 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42753 , the table toolbar
42754 \begin_inset Index idx
42757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42766 \begin_inset space ~
42771 manual and the math macro toolbar
42772 \begin_inset Index idx
42775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42788 \begin_layout Chapter
42789 The Document Settings
42790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42792 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42797 \begin_inset Index idx
42800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42801 Document ! Settings
42809 \begin_layout Standard
42813 \begin_inset space ~
42818 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42819 is called with the menu
42821 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42825 You can save your document settings as default with the
42827 Save as Document Defaults
42829 button in any dialog.
42830 This will create a template named
42834 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42835 when you create a new document without
42839 \begin_layout Standard
42844 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42845 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42848 \begin_layout Standard
42849 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42850 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42851 to find the one you are looking for.
42852 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42853 the submenus of the dialog.
42855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42859 \begin_inset space \space{}
42863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42870 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42871 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42872 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42875 \begin_layout Section
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42880 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42882 Document classes are described in section
42883 \begin_inset space ~
42887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42889 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42897 \begin_layout Standard
42901 \begin_inset space ~
42906 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42911 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42912 as a layout for a document class.
42913 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42915 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42924 \begin_layout Standard
42925 Some classes use special class options by default.
42926 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42930 and you can decide to use them or not.
42931 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42932 recommended you leave them untouched.
42937 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42938 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42943 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42945 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42951 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42952 \begin_inset Newline newline
42957 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42960 \begin_inset Newline newline
42963 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42964 distribution, see section
42969 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42971 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42984 \begin_layout Standard
42989 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42990 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42991 in the background if the child document
42992 is opened without its master.
42993 This way child documents are always compilable.
42994 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43001 \begin_inset space ~
43009 \begin_layout Standard
43010 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43021 \begin_inset Index idx
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 packages ! prettyref
43032 \begin_inset Index idx
43035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43037 packages ! refstyle
43042 for cross-references, see section
43043 \begin_inset space ~
43047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43049 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43056 \begin_layout Section
43060 \begin_layout Standard
43061 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43062 Please refer to the section
43065 \begin_inset space ~
43073 \begin_inset space ~
43078 manual for details.
43081 \begin_layout Section
43085 \begin_layout Standard
43086 Modules are explained in section
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43093 reference "subsec:Modules"
43100 \begin_layout Section
43104 \begin_layout Standard
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43112 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43119 \begin_layout Section
43123 \begin_layout Standard
43124 The document font settings are described in section
43125 \begin_inset space ~
43129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43131 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43138 \begin_layout Section
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43143 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43160 and whether it should be a
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43168 can also be specified here.
43171 \begin_layout Standard
43172 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43173 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43174 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43176 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43179 \begin_layout Standard
43182 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43185 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43186 justifies the text on screen.
43187 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43191 \begin_layout Section
43195 \begin_layout Standard
43196 This dialog is described in sections
43197 \begin_inset space ~
43201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43203 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43210 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43217 \begin_layout Section
43221 \begin_layout Standard
43222 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43229 reference "subsec:Margins"
43236 \begin_layout Section
43238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43240 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43245 \begin_inset Index idx
43248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43249 Language ! Encoding
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43258 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43259 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43260 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43262 is always encoded in utf8).
43263 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43264 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43265 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43266 -command is not known for
43267 a particular character).
43270 \begin_layout Standard
43271 If you use the option
43276 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43277 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43278 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43280 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43281 exactly one encoding.
43282 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43285 \begin_layout Standard
43287 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43288 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43289 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43290 installation supports Unicode), choose
43291 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43292 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43293 is quite incomplete, so
43294 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43299 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43300 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43301 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43302 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43303 -commands is not used, because all
43304 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43305 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43306 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43307 , two new alternative engines
43308 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43310 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43312 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43315 \begin_inset space ~
43323 \begin_inset space ~
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43337 \begin_inset space ~
43341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43343 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43348 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43352 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43355 \begin_layout Standard
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43364 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43365 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43375 The possible settings are:
43378 \begin_layout Description
43379 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43381 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43382 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43386 \begin_inset space ~
43390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43392 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43399 \begin_layout Description
43400 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43401 format you will use.
43402 In many cases this will be
43407 \begin_inset Index idx
43410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43418 If the newer package
43423 \begin_inset Index idx
43426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43428 packages ! polyglossia
43433 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43434 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43435 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43437 this package will be used instead of
43444 \begin_layout Description
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43457 would be more appropriate.
43460 \begin_layout Description
43461 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43462 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43466 (for German texts), type in
43469 \begin_inset Newline newline
43474 usepackage{ngerman}
43477 \begin_layout Description
43478 None will not use a language package.
43479 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43482 \begin_layout Standard
43483 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43486 \begin_layout Description
43488 \begin_inset space ~
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43503 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43509 \begin_inset Index idx
43512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43514 packages ! inputenc
43520 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43521 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43522 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43526 \begin_layout Description
43527 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43529 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43530 commands, which may result in a big
43531 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43532 -commands are needed.
43535 \begin_layout Description
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43541 \begin_inset space ~
43544 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43547 \begin_layout Description
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43556 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43559 \begin_layout Description
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43564 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43567 \begin_layout Description
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43576 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43577 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43580 \begin_layout Description
43582 \begin_inset space ~
43586 \begin_inset space ~
43589 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43593 \begin_layout Description
43595 \begin_inset space ~
43599 \begin_inset space ~
43602 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43603 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43606 \begin_layout Description
43608 \begin_inset space ~
43612 \begin_inset space ~
43616 \begin_inset space ~
43619 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43620 \begin_inset space ~
43626 \begin_layout Description
43628 \begin_inset space ~
43632 \begin_inset space ~
43636 \begin_inset space ~
43639 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43640 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43643 \begin_layout Description
43645 \begin_inset space ~
43649 \begin_inset space ~
43652 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43653 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43654 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43655 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43656 \begin_inset space ~
43660 \begin_inset space ~
43666 \begin_layout Description
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43672 \begin_inset space ~
43675 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43676 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43677 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43679 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43690 \begin_layout Description
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43699 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43702 \begin_layout Description
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43708 \begin_inset space ~
43711 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43714 \begin_layout Description
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43720 \begin_inset space ~
43723 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43726 \begin_layout Description
43728 \begin_inset space ~
43731 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43734 \begin_layout Description
43736 \begin_inset space ~
43739 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43742 \begin_layout Description
43744 \begin_inset space ~
43748 \begin_inset space ~
43751 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43754 \begin_layout Description
43756 \begin_inset space ~
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43766 \begin_layout Description
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43775 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43778 \begin_layout Description
43780 \begin_inset space ~
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43790 \begin_layout Description
43792 \begin_inset space ~
43796 \begin_inset space ~
43799 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43805 \begin_inset Index idx
43808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43815 , when using this, set the document language to
43820 \begin_layout Description
43822 \begin_inset space ~
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43829 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43834 , when using this, set the document language to
43837 \begin_inset space ~
43843 \begin_layout Description
43845 \begin_inset space ~
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43852 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43858 \begin_inset Index idx
43861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43863 packages ! japanese
43868 , when using this, set the document language to
43873 \begin_layout Description
43875 \begin_inset space ~
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43882 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43887 , when using this, set the document language to
43892 \begin_layout Description
43894 \begin_inset space ~
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43901 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43906 , when using this, set the document language to
43911 \begin_layout Description
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43916 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43919 \begin_layout Description
43921 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43929 \begin_inset space ~
43932 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43935 \begin_layout Description
43937 \begin_inset space ~
43941 \begin_inset space ~
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43948 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43949 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43950 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43953 \begin_layout Description
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset space ~
43965 \begin_layout Description
43967 \begin_inset space ~
43971 \begin_inset space ~
43974 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43975 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43978 \begin_layout Description
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43987 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43993 \begin_inset Index idx
43996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44006 \begin_layout Description
44008 \begin_inset space ~
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44019 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44026 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44029 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44036 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44037 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44039 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44042 \begin_layout Description
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44051 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44057 \begin_inset Index idx
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44067 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44070 \begin_layout Description
44072 \begin_inset space ~
44075 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44081 \begin_inset Index idx
44084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44086 packages ! inputenc
44092 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44096 \begin_layout Description
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44106 \begin_inset space ~
44109 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44116 \begin_layout Description
44118 \begin_inset space ~
44122 \begin_inset space ~
44126 \begin_inset space ~
44129 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44130 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44131 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44135 \begin_layout Description
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44141 \begin_inset space ~
44145 \begin_inset space ~
44148 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44149 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44152 \begin_layout Section
44154 \begin_inset Index idx
44157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44164 \begin_inset Index idx
44167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44174 \begin_inset Index idx
44177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44178 Color ! Shaded boxes
44184 \begin_inset Index idx
44187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44188 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44196 \begin_layout Standard
44197 Here you can alter the font color for the
44201 (default: black), for
44204 \begin_inset space ~
44209 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44213 (default: white) and for
44216 \begin_inset space ~
44226 sets the color back to the default.
44229 \begin_layout Standard
44230 Clicking any button showing
44238 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44239 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44240 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44241 later more quickly.
44244 \begin_layout Standard
44245 Note, if you change the
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44253 font color and use the option
44256 \begin_inset space ~
44261 in the document settings under
44264 \begin_inset space ~
44269 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44270 \begin_inset space ~
44274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44276 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44283 \begin_layout Standard
44284 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44290 \begin_layout Standard
44294 \begin_inset space ~
44303 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44306 \begin_inset space ~
44309 Code after a forced page break:
44312 \begin_layout Itemize
44313 For the page color:
44314 \begin_inset Newline newline
44321 pagecolor{color name}
44324 \begin_layout Itemize
44325 For the text color:
44326 \begin_inset Newline newline
44336 \begin_layout Standard
44337 You are restricted to one of
44373 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44386 \begin_inset Newline newline
44389 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44390 names to refer to them:
44393 \begin_layout Itemize
44399 \begin_inset Newline newline
44404 page_backgroundcolor
44407 \begin_layout Itemize
44411 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_inset Newline newline
44425 \begin_layout Itemize
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44435 \begin_inset Newline newline
44443 \begin_layout Itemize
44447 \begin_inset space ~
44453 \begin_inset Newline newline
44461 \begin_layout Standard
44462 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44465 \begin_inset space ~
44473 \begin_inset space ~
44481 \begin_layout Section
44485 \begin_layout Standard
44486 Here you can adjust the
44490 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44494 as described in section
44495 \begin_inset space ~
44499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44501 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44508 \begin_layout Section
44512 \begin_layout Standard
44513 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44519 \begin_inset Index idx
44522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44524 packages ! biblatex
44534 \begin_inset Index idx
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44549 \begin_inset Index idx
44552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44560 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44563 Sectioned bibliography
44565 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44571 \begin_inset Index idx
44574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44576 packages ! bibtopic
44586 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44587 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44591 for the generation of the bibliography.
44592 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44593 \begin_inset space ~
44597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44599 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44606 \begin_layout Section
44610 \begin_layout Standard
44611 Here you can define the
44615 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44617 \begin_inset space ~
44621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44623 reference "sec:Index"
44630 \begin_layout Section
44634 \begin_layout Standard
44635 The PDF properties are explained in section
44636 \begin_inset space ~
44640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44642 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44649 \begin_layout Section
44653 \begin_layout Standard
44654 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44655 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44661 \begin_inset Index idx
44664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44676 \begin_inset Index idx
44679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44691 \begin_inset Index idx
44694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44706 \begin_inset Index idx
44709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44721 \begin_inset Index idx
44724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44726 packages ! mathdots
44736 \begin_inset Index idx
44739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44741 packages ! mathtools
44751 \begin_inset Index idx
44754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44766 \begin_inset Index idx
44769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44771 packages ! stackrel
44781 \begin_inset Index idx
44784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44786 packages ! stmaryrd
44796 \begin_inset Index idx
44799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 packages ! undertilde
44806 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44809 \begin_layout Description
44810 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44811 -errors in formulas,
44812 ensure that you have this enabled.
44815 \begin_layout Description
44816 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44817 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44818 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44822 \begin_layout Description
44823 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44838 \begin_layout Description
44839 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44842 \begin_inset space ~
44854 \begin_layout Description
44855 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44866 \begin_layout Description
44867 mathtools is used for the math commands
44903 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44910 \begin_layout Description
44911 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44913 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44922 \begin_layout Description
44923 stackrel is used for the math command
44940 \begin_layout Description
44941 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44944 \begin_layout Description
44945 undertilde is used for the math command
44953 Accents for one Character
44962 \begin_layout Section
44966 \begin_layout Standard
44967 The float placement options are described in the section
44970 \begin_inset space ~
44978 \begin_inset space ~
44986 \begin_layout Section
44990 \begin_layout Standard
44991 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44993 Program Code Listings
44998 \begin_inset space ~
45006 \begin_layout Section
45010 \begin_layout Standard
45011 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45019 set to be used and set the
45024 The itemize environment is described in section
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45031 reference "sec:Itemize"
45038 \begin_layout Standard
45039 You can furthermore specify a
45042 \begin_inset space ~
45047 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45048 command of the desired character.
45049 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45056 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45062 \begin_inset space \space{}
45066 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45076 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45077 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45080 \begin_layout Standard
45081 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45089 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45090 -packages in the preamble (menu
45093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45094 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45103 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45107 usepackage{textcomp}
45110 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45114 usepackage{amssymb}
45124 \begin_layout Section
45128 \begin_layout Standard
45129 Branches are described in section
45130 \begin_inset space ~
45134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45136 reference "sec:Branches"
45143 \begin_layout Section
45145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45147 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45154 \begin_layout Standard
45155 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45158 \begin_layout Description
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45167 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45187 View Master Document
45188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45195 Update Master Document
45196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45203 menu or the toolbar.
45204 The default is set in
45206 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45207 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45209 \begin_inset space ~
45212 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45216 \begin_inset space ~
45220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45222 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45229 \begin_layout Description
45231 \begin_inset space ~
45235 \begin_inset space ~
45238 Output settings for the menu
45240 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45248 For a detailed description see section
45250 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45255 \begin_inset space ~
45263 \begin_layout Description
45265 \begin_inset space ~
45269 \begin_inset space ~
45272 Options offers settings for the export format
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45285 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45286 \begin_inset space ~
45289 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45298 settings are described in detail in section
45300 Math Output in XHTML
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45314 \begin_inset space ~
45318 \begin_inset space ~
45323 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45326 \begin_layout Description
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45333 Save transient properties
45335 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45336 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45337 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45341 \begin_layout Itemize
45342 the activation of change tracking
45345 \begin_layout Itemize
45346 the output of tracked changes
45349 \begin_layout Itemize
45350 the recording of the document directory path.
45353 \begin_layout Standard
45354 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45355 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45359 \begin_layout Section
45367 \begin_layout Standard
45368 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45370 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45372 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45374 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45378 \begin_layout Standard
45379 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45380 -syntax is given in section
45381 \begin_inset space ~
45385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45387 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45394 \begin_layout Chapter
45400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45402 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45407 \begin_inset Index idx
45410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 \begin_layout Standard
45420 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45426 It has the following submenus.
45429 \begin_layout Section
45433 \begin_layout Subsection
45437 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45438 User Interface File
45439 \begin_inset Index idx
45442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45443 Customization ! of toolbars
45449 \begin_inset Index idx
45452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45453 Customization ! of menus
45461 \begin_layout Standard
45462 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45463 interface (ui) file.
45464 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45472 \begin_layout Description
45477 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45480 \begin_layout Description
45487 the menu entries in popup context menus
45490 \begin_layout Description
45495 specifies the toolbar buttons
45498 \begin_layout Standard
45499 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45500 and edit the entries.
45503 \begin_layout Standard
45504 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45516 entries must be finished with an explicit
45541 and in the case of the
45542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45554 The syntax for the entries is:
45557 \begin_layout Standard
45558 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45587 \begin_layout Standard
45589 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45592 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45593 -functions are listed in the menu
45595 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45597 \begin_inset space ~
45605 \begin_layout Standard
45606 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45612 \begin_layout Standard
45613 For example, assuming you use the menu
45615 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45618 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45622 \begin_layout Standard
45623 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45647 \begin_layout Standard
45649 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45664 to have the sixth bookmark.
45667 \begin_layout Standard
45671 \begin_inset space ~
45676 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45677 's toolbar buttons.
45678 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45679 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45682 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45697 Enable tool tips in main work area
45699 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45703 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45707 \begin_layout Standard
45712 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45713 should display in the menu
45715 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45717 \begin_inset space ~
45725 \begin_layout Subsection
45729 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45733 \begin_layout Standard
45736 Restore window layouts and geometries
45739 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45740 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45744 \begin_layout Standard
45747 Restore cursor positions
45749 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45753 \begin_layout Standard
45756 Load opened files from last session
45758 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45762 \begin_layout Standard
45765 Clear all session information
45767 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45768 sessions (cursor positions, names
45769 of last opened documents, etc.).
45772 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45776 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45781 \begin_inset Index idx
45784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45793 \begin_layout Standard
45796 Backup original documents when saving
45798 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45799 it was saved the last time.
45800 It is stored in the
45803 \begin_inset space ~
45809 \begin_inset space ~
45813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45815 reference "sec:Paths"
45819 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45822 \begin_inset space ~
45828 The backup file has the file extension
45829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45843 \begin_layout Standard
45846 Backup documents, every
45848 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45851 \begin_layout Standard
45854 Save documents compressed by default
45856 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45857 \begin_inset space ~
45861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45863 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45868 This applies to newly created documents only.
45869 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45873 Windows & work area
45876 \begin_layout Standard
45879 Open documents in tabs
45881 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45885 \begin_layout Standard
45890 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45897 \begin_inset space ~
45901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45903 reference "sec:Paths"
45907 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45914 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45915 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45916 of \SpecialChar LyX
45918 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45919 instance is created for each file.
45922 \begin_layout Standard
45925 Single close-tab button
45927 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45937 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45938 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45939 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45943 \begin_layout Standard
45944 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45952 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45953 before the change takes effect.
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45966 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45968 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45970 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45974 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45975 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45976 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45979 \begin_layout Subsection
45981 \begin_inset Index idx
45984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45993 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46000 \begin_layout Standard
46001 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46005 \begin_layout Standard
46006 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46014 This section only deals with the fonts
46018 the \SpecialChar LyX
46020 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46024 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46035 \begin_layout Standard
46036 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46053 (depends on the system) as its
46056 \begin_inset space ~
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 You can change the font size with the
46080 \begin_layout Standard
46085 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46090 points have the size of 1
46091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46101 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46106 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46111 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46112 \begin_inset space ~
46116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46118 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46125 \begin_layout Standard
46128 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46130 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46131 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46132 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46133 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46134 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46136 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46137 \begin_inset space ~
46143 \begin_layout Subsection
46145 \begin_inset Index idx
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46156 \begin_inset Index idx
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46168 \begin_layout Standard
46169 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46170 by choosing an item in the
46171 list and selecting the
46178 \begin_layout Standard
46179 By checking the option
46183 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46186 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46187 \begin_inset space ~
46191 \begin_inset space ~
46196 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46199 \begin_layout Subsection
46201 \begin_inset Index idx
46204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46218 \begin_layout Standard
46223 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46224 This feature is described in section
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46231 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46238 \begin_layout Standard
46239 Checking the option
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46246 \begin_inset space ~
46250 \begin_inset space ~
46255 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46258 \begin_layout Section
46260 \begin_inset Index idx
46263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46272 \begin_layout Subsection
46276 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46280 \begin_layout Standard
46283 Cursor follows scrollbar
46285 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46289 \begin_layout Standard
46290 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46291 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46292 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46295 \begin_layout Standard
46298 Scroll below end of document
46300 is self-explanatory.
46303 \begin_layout Standard
46304 In \SpecialChar LyX
46305 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46312 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46314 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46315 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46318 \begin_layout Standard
46321 Sort environments alphabetically
46323 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46326 \begin_layout Standard
46329 Group environments by their category
46331 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46334 \begin_layout Standard
46339 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46350 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46354 \begin_layout Standard
46355 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46360 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46361 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46365 \begin_layout Subsection
46367 \begin_inset Index idx
46370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46377 \begin_inset Index idx
46380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46381 Settings ! Shortcuts
46389 \begin_layout Standard
46394 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46396 Several binding files are available, among them:
46399 \begin_layout Description
46400 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46403 \begin_layout Description
46404 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46416 \begin_layout Description
46417 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46428 \begin_layout Standard
46429 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46434 , and binding files for special languages.
46435 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46440 \begin_inset space \space{}
46444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46452 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46453 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46454 will try to use the appropriate binding
46458 \begin_layout Standard
46459 Some binding files, like
46463 , only have a limited scope.
46464 When looking at the end of the file
46468 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46471 \begin_layout Standard
46475 \begin_inset space ~
46479 \begin_inset space ~
46484 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46485 in the selected key binding file.
46488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46492 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46497 \begin_inset Index idx
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46501 Key Bindings ! Editing
46509 \begin_layout Standard
46510 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46511 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46512 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46513 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46516 Show key-bindings containing
46519 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46520 Insert there for example as keyword
46521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46528 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46529 functions that contain
46530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46538 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46539 All \SpecialChar LyX
46540 functions are also listed in the file
46545 that you will find in the
46552 \begin_layout Standard
46553 For example, to add the shortcut
46561 , select the function and press the
46566 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46567 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46570 \begin_layout Standard
46571 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46572 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46574 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46575 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46577 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46582 \begin_layout Standard
46583 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46586 \begin_layout Standard
46587 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46589 The syntax of the entries is:
46592 \begin_layout Standard
46598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46617 \begin_layout Standard
46618 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46619 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46647 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46648 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46649 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46650 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46652 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46656 , you needed to specify it as
46661 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46664 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46667 \begin_layout Subsection
46669 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46671 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46676 \begin_inset Index idx
46679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46686 \begin_inset Index idx
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46690 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46698 \begin_layout Standard
46699 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46700 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46701 provides keyboard maps.
46702 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46703 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46706 \begin_inset space ~
46710 \begin_inset space ~
46715 and select the keyboard map file named
46722 \begin_layout Standard
46731 keyboard map and, if you use the
46735 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46738 arg "keymap-primary"
46744 arg "keymap-secondary"
46747 respectively or toggle between them with
46750 arg "keymap-toggle"
46756 \begin_layout Standard
46757 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46765 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46774 \begin_layout Standard
46775 You can also specify the mouse
46777 Wheel scrolling speed
46780 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46784 Middle mouse button pasting
46786 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46787 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46790 \begin_layout Standard
46798 \begin_inset space ~
46802 \begin_inset space ~
46807 you can select a key for zooming.
46808 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46811 \begin_layout Subsection
46815 \begin_layout Standard
46816 Input completion is described in section
46817 \begin_inset space ~
46821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46823 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46830 \begin_layout Section
46832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46839 \begin_inset Index idx
46842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46849 \begin_inset Index idx
46852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46861 \begin_layout Standard
46862 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46863 are normally determined during
46865 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46868 \begin_layout Description
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46873 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46874 's working directory.
46875 It is the default when you
46886 \begin_inset space ~
46894 \begin_layout Description
46896 \begin_inset space ~
46899 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46901 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46903 \begin_inset space ~
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46915 \begin_layout Description
46917 \begin_inset space ~
46920 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46926 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46930 \begin_inset Newline newline
46934 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46946 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46947 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46955 \begin_layout Description
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46961 \begin_inset Index idx
46964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46970 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46971 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46972 \begin_inset space ~
46976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46978 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46986 will be used to save the backups.
46987 \begin_inset Newline newline
46990 Backup files have the ending
46991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47001 \begin_layout Description
47003 \begin_inset space ~
47006 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47007 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47009 \begin_inset Newline newline
47016 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47022 You can edit this file with the program
47031 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47032 in its preferences under
47035 \begin_inset space ~
47041 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47046 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47048 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47049 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47055 and \SpecialChar LyX
47056 need to be running the same time.
47057 \begin_inset Newline newline
47060 The pipe is also used for the
47064 feature, see section
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47071 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47076 \begin_inset Newline newline
47079 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47080 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47081 \begin_inset Newline newline
47097 \begin_layout Description
47099 \begin_inset space ~
47102 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47105 \begin_layout Description
47107 \begin_inset space ~
47110 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47111 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47112 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47115 \begin_layout Description
47117 \begin_inset space ~
47120 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47126 You only need to specify it if you are using
47130 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47132 For \SpecialChar LyX
47137 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47141 \begin_layout Description
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47146 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47147 When \SpecialChar LyX
47148 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47149 to find it on the system.
47150 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47152 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47161 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47162 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47165 \begin_layout Description
47167 \begin_inset space ~
47170 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47171 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47172 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47173 code or in the document
47175 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47177 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47178 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47179 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47180 scanned for the input files.
47181 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47182 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47184 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47185 compilation may fail for some documents.
47188 \begin_layout Section
47192 \begin_layout Standard
47193 Here you can insert your
47202 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47204 \begin_inset space ~
47208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47210 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47214 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47217 \begin_layout Section
47219 \begin_inset Index idx
47222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47223 Language ! Settings
47229 \begin_inset Index idx
47232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47233 Settings ! Language
47241 \begin_layout Subsection
47243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47245 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47252 \begin_layout Description
47254 \begin_inset space ~
47258 \begin_inset space ~
47261 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47263 You can find its actual translation status here:
47264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47266 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47274 \begin_layout Description
47276 \begin_inset space ~
47279 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47280 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47281 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47282 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47299 The most widespread language package is
47304 \begin_inset Index idx
47307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47314 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47316 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47317 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47318 come with the alternative
47324 \begin_inset Index idx
47327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47329 packages ! polyglossia
47334 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47335 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47341 The available selections are described in section
47342 \begin_inset space ~
47346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47348 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47355 \begin_layout Description
47357 \begin_inset space ~
47360 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47361 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47362 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47363 An example is the start command
47369 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47371 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47375 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47391 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47396 \begin_layout Description
47398 \begin_inset space ~
47406 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47407 command toggles the package on and off.
47410 \begin_layout Description
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47416 \begin_inset space ~
47419 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47423 \begin_layout Description
47425 \begin_inset space ~
47429 \begin_inset space ~
47432 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47436 \begin_layout Description
47438 \begin_inset space ~
47442 \begin_inset space ~
47445 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47446 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47447 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47449 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47456 \begin_layout Description
47458 \begin_inset space ~
47461 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47463 When this option is not set, the
47466 \begin_inset space ~
47471 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47473 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47476 \begin_inset space ~
47484 \begin_layout Description
47486 \begin_inset space ~
47492 \begin_inset space ~
47498 When it is not set, the
47501 \begin_inset space ~
47506 is set to the end of the document.
47509 \begin_layout Description
47511 \begin_inset space ~
47515 \begin_inset space ~
47518 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47519 language will be underlined in blue.
47522 \begin_layout Description
47524 \begin_inset space ~
47528 \begin_inset space ~
47531 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47532 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47535 \begin_layout Description
47537 \begin_inset space ~
47540 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47541 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47542 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47543 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47546 \begin_layout Subsection
47550 \begin_layout Standard
47551 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47552 \begin_inset space ~
47556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47558 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47565 \begin_layout Section
47569 \begin_layout Subsection
47571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47573 name "subsec:General-output"
47580 \begin_layout Description
47582 \begin_inset space ~
47585 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47587 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47589 \begin_inset space ~
47595 For a detailed description see section
47597 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47610 \begin_layout Description
47612 \begin_inset space ~
47615 Options Options for the program
47619 that is used for the export format
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47630 reference "subsec:Export"
47635 Possible options are listed in the
47640 \begin_inset Newline newline
47644 \begin_inset Flex URL
47647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47649 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47659 \begin_layout Description
47661 \begin_inset space ~
47665 \begin_inset space ~
47668 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47671 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47672 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47674 \begin_inset space ~
47680 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47683 \begin_layout Description
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47689 \begin_inset Index idx
47692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47699 \begin_inset Index idx
47702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47703 Settings ! Date format
47708 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47709 \begin_inset Newline newline
47713 \begin_inset Flex URL
47716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47718 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47724 \begin_inset Newline newline
47727 For example the format
47728 \begin_inset Newline newline
47732 \begin_inset Newline newline
47735 prints the date as day/month/year.
47738 \begin_layout Description
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47747 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47748 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47751 \begin_layout Subsection
47757 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47759 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47764 \begin_inset Index idx
47767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47768 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47777 \begin_layout Description
47779 \begin_inset space ~
47787 \begin_inset space ~
47791 \begin_inset space ~
47794 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47799 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47820 are used for Cyrillic.
47821 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47834 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47836 sets up in the background.
47837 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47840 \begin_layout Description
47842 \begin_inset space ~
47846 \begin_inset space ~
47850 \begin_inset space ~
47854 \begin_inset space ~
47857 options They only have an effect when the program
47861 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47864 \begin_layout Standard
47865 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47866 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47867 manuals of the applications.
47870 \begin_layout Description
47872 \begin_inset space ~
47875 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47876 \begin_inset space ~
47880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47882 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47889 \begin_layout Description
47891 \begin_inset space ~
47894 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47895 \begin_inset space ~
47899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47901 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47908 \begin_layout Description
47910 \begin_inset space ~
47913 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47914 \begin_inset space ~
47918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47920 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47927 \begin_layout Description
47933 \begin_inset space ~
47936 command Command for the program
47938 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47941 that is described in the section
47943 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47948 Additional Features
47953 \begin_layout Standard
47954 There are additionally the following options:
47957 \begin_layout Description
47959 \begin_inset space ~
47963 \begin_inset space ~
47967 \begin_inset space ~
47971 \begin_inset space ~
47976 \begin_inset space ~
47979 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47997 to separate folders.
47998 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48000 \begin_inset Index idx
48003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48010 \begin_inset Index idx
48013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48022 \begin_layout Description
48024 \begin_inset space ~
48028 \begin_inset space ~
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48036 \begin_inset space ~
48040 \begin_inset space ~
48044 \begin_inset space ~
48047 changes Removes all manually set
48053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48054 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48061 dialog when changing the document class.
48064 \begin_layout Section
48066 \begin_inset space ~
48070 \begin_inset Index idx
48073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48082 \begin_layout Subsection
48084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48086 name "subsec:Converters"
48091 \begin_inset Index idx
48094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48103 \begin_layout Standard
48104 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48105 from one format to another.
48106 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48107 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48114 \begin_inset space ~
48119 field and press the
48124 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48128 \begin_inset space ~
48133 drop-down list, modify the
48137 field and press the
48144 \begin_layout Standard
48147 Converter File Cache
48153 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48155 Maximum Age (in days
48158 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48159 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48162 \begin_layout Standard
48163 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48164 definition, is described in the section
48175 \begin_layout Subsection
48177 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48179 name "sec:File-Formats"
48184 \begin_inset Index idx
48187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48194 \begin_inset Index idx
48197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48206 \begin_layout Standard
48207 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48217 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48220 \begin_layout Standard
48221 You can also define the
48223 Default output format
48225 that is used when you use
48227 View, Update, View Master Document
48231 Update Master Document
48237 menu or the toolbar.
48240 \begin_layout Standard
48241 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48252 \begin_layout Standard
48253 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48255 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48256 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48257 This is done by specifying a
48262 More about this is described in the section
48273 \begin_layout Chapter
48274 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48276 \begin_inset Index idx
48279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48288 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48295 \begin_layout Standard
48297 \begin_inset space ~
48301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48303 reference "tab:Units"
48307 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48308 and used in this documentation.
48311 \begin_layout Standard
48312 \begin_inset Float table
48318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48319 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48337 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48345 \begin_inset Tabular
48346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48347 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48349 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48503 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48774 scaled point (65536
48775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48966 % of original image width
48971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49055 \begin_layout Chapter
49057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49059 name "chap:Credits"
49066 \begin_layout Standard
49067 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49068 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49071 \begin_layout Itemize
49074 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49077 \begin_layout Itemize
49083 \begin_layout Itemize
49089 \begin_layout Itemize
49095 \begin_layout Itemize
49101 \begin_layout Itemize
49107 \begin_layout Itemize
49113 \begin_layout Itemize
49119 \begin_layout Itemize
49122 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49125 \begin_layout Itemize
49131 \begin_layout Itemize
49137 \begin_layout Itemize
49143 \begin_layout Itemize
49149 \begin_layout Itemize
49155 \begin_layout Itemize
49161 \begin_layout Itemize
49167 \begin_layout Itemize
49173 \begin_layout Itemize
49174 The \SpecialChar LyX
49176 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49186 \begin_layout Standard
49187 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49190 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49197 \begin_layout Bibliography
49198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49199 LatexCommand bibitem
49206 The \SpecialChar LyX
49208 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49211 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49217 \begin_inset Newline newline
49221 \begin_inset Flex URL
49224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49226 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49234 \begin_layout Bibliography
49235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49236 LatexCommand bibitem
49237 key "latexcompanion"
49242 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49244 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49245 Companion Second Edition.
49248 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49251 \begin_layout Bibliography
49252 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49253 LatexCommand bibitem
49259 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49262 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49266 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49269 \begin_layout Bibliography
49270 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49271 LatexCommand bibitem
49280 : A Document Preparation System.
49283 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49286 \begin_layout Bibliography
49287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49288 LatexCommand bibitem
49298 The \SpecialChar TeX
49302 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49305 \begin_layout Bibliography
49306 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49307 LatexCommand bibitem
49313 The \SpecialChar TeX
49315 \begin_inset Newline newline
49319 \begin_inset Flex URL
49322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49324 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49332 \begin_layout Bibliography
49333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49334 LatexCommand bibitem
49340 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49342 \begin_inset Newline newline
49346 \begin_inset Flex URL
49349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49351 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49359 \begin_layout Bibliography
49360 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49361 LatexCommand bibitem
49368 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49370 name "Documentation"
49371 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49378 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49382 \begin_inset Newline newline
49386 \begin_inset Flex URL
49389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49391 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49399 \begin_layout Bibliography
49400 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49401 LatexCommand bibitem
49408 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49410 name "Documentation"
49411 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49416 how to use the program
49418 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49422 \begin_inset Newline newline
49426 \begin_inset Flex URL
49429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49431 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49439 \begin_layout Bibliography
49440 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49441 LatexCommand bibitem
49448 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49450 name "Documentation"
49451 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49456 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49462 \begin_inset Index idx
49465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49467 packages ! biblatex
49473 \begin_inset Newline newline
49477 \begin_inset Flex URL
49480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49482 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49490 \begin_layout Bibliography
49491 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49492 LatexCommand bibitem
49499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49501 name "Documentation"
49502 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49507 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49513 \begin_inset Index idx
49516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49524 \begin_inset Newline newline
49528 \begin_inset Flex URL
49531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49533 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49541 \begin_layout Bibliography
49542 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49543 LatexCommand bibitem
49550 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49552 name "Documentation"
49553 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49563 \begin_inset Newline newline
49567 \begin_inset Flex URL
49570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49572 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49580 \begin_layout Bibliography
49581 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49582 LatexCommand bibitem
49583 key "makeindex-man"
49589 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49592 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49602 \begin_inset Newline newline
49606 \begin_inset Flex URL
49609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49611 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49619 \begin_layout Bibliography
49620 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49621 LatexCommand bibitem
49628 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49630 name "Documentation"
49631 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49641 \begin_inset Newline newline
49645 \begin_inset Flex URL
49648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49650 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49658 \begin_layout Bibliography
49659 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49660 LatexCommand bibitem
49667 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49669 name "Documentation"
49670 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49675 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49677 \begin_inset Newline newline
49681 \begin_inset Flex URL
49684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49686 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49694 \begin_layout Bibliography
49695 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49696 LatexCommand bibitem
49703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49705 name "Documentation"
49706 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49711 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49717 \begin_inset Index idx
49720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49728 \begin_inset Newline newline
49732 \begin_inset Flex URL
49735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49737 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49745 \begin_layout Bibliography
49746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49747 LatexCommand bibitem
49754 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49756 name "Documentation"
49757 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49762 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49768 \begin_inset Index idx
49771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49773 packages ! enumitem
49779 \begin_inset Newline newline
49783 \begin_inset Flex URL
49786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49788 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49796 \begin_layout Bibliography
49797 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49798 LatexCommand bibitem
49805 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49807 name "Documentation"
49808 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49813 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49819 \begin_inset Index idx
49822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49824 packages ! fancyhdr
49830 \begin_inset Newline newline
49834 \begin_inset Flex URL
49837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49839 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49847 \begin_layout Bibliography
49848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49849 LatexCommand bibitem
49856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49858 name "Documentation"
49859 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49864 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49870 \begin_inset Index idx
49873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49875 packages ! hyperref
49881 \begin_inset Newline newline
49885 \begin_inset Flex URL
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49890 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49898 \begin_layout Bibliography
49899 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49900 LatexCommand bibitem
49907 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49909 name "Documentation"
49910 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49915 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49921 \begin_inset Index idx
49924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49926 packages ! microtpye
49932 \begin_inset Newline newline
49936 \begin_inset Flex URL
49939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49941 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49949 \begin_layout Bibliography
49950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49951 LatexCommand bibitem
49958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49960 name "Documentation"
49961 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49966 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49972 \begin_inset Index idx
49975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49983 \begin_inset Newline newline
49987 \begin_inset Flex URL
49990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49992 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50000 \begin_layout Bibliography
50001 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50002 LatexCommand bibitem
50009 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50011 name "Documentation"
50012 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50017 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50023 \begin_inset Index idx
50026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50028 packages ! prettyref
50034 \begin_inset Newline newline
50038 \begin_inset Flex URL
50041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50043 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50051 \begin_layout Bibliography
50052 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50053 LatexCommand bibitem
50060 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50062 name "Documentation"
50063 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50068 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50074 \begin_inset Index idx
50077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50079 packages ! refstyle
50085 \begin_inset Newline newline
50089 \begin_inset Flex URL
50092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50094 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50102 \begin_layout Bibliography
50103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50104 LatexCommand bibitem
50111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50114 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50119 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50121 \begin_inset Newline newline
50125 \begin_inset Flex URL
50128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50130 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50138 \begin_layout Bibliography
50139 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50140 LatexCommand bibitem
50147 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50150 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50155 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50157 \begin_inset Newline newline
50161 \begin_inset Flex URL
50164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50166 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50174 \begin_layout Bibliography
50175 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50176 LatexCommand bibitem
50183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50186 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50191 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50192 for Cyrillic languages:
50193 \begin_inset Newline newline
50197 \begin_inset Flex URL
50200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50202 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50210 \begin_layout Bibliography
50211 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50212 LatexCommand bibitem
50219 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50222 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50227 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50229 \begin_inset Newline newline
50233 \begin_inset Flex URL
50236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50238 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50246 \begin_layout Bibliography
50247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50248 LatexCommand bibitem
50255 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50258 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50263 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50265 \begin_inset Newline newline
50269 \begin_inset Flex URL
50272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50274 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50282 \begin_layout Bibliography
50283 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50284 LatexCommand bibitem
50291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50294 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50299 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50301 \begin_inset Newline newline
50305 \begin_inset Flex URL
50308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50310 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50318 \begin_layout Standard
50319 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50353 \begin_inset Note Note
50356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50363 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50364 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50365 bibliography is the second one:
50373 \begin_layout Standard
50374 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50375 LatexCommand bibtex
50376 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50377 options "biblio/alphadin"
50384 \begin_layout Standard
50385 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50389 \begin_layout Standard
50393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50399 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50408 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50416 \begin_inset Note Note
50419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50420 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50421 \begin_inset space ~
50425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50427 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50439 \begin_layout Standard
50440 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50441 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50447 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50448 LatexCommand printindex